1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
© CANON INC. 2015 CDD-E635-020
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(
=
15) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Camera User Guide
ENGLISH
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-10L
(with terminal cover)
Battery Charger
CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Neck Strap
Lens Cap
(with cord)
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
2).
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
● SD memory cards*
1
● SDHC memory cards*
1
*
2
● SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Before Use
3
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Conventions in This Guide
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (
=
4).
[ ] Continuous ring (20) on front
[ ] Front dial (7) on front
[ ] Up button (10) on back
[ ] Left button (11) on back
[ ] Right button (18) on back
[ ] Down button (19) on back
[ ] Control dial (12) on back
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
: Indicates touch-screen operations
●
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images.
● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic lm for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the lm before
using the camera.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
4
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
(
14
)
(
8
)
(
9
)
(
11
)
(
10
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(
15
)
(
16
)
(
18
)
(
20
)
(
19
)
(
1
) (
2
)
(
21
)
(
3
) (
4
) (
5
)
(
6
) (
7
)
(
17
)
(1) Screen (LCD monitor)*
2
(2) Hot shoe / Hot shoe cap
(3) [
(Mobile Device Connection)]
button
(4) Indicator
(5) Remote switch terminal
(6) DIGITAL terminal
(7) HDMI
TM
terminal
(8) [
(Shortcut)] button
(9) [
(Playback)] button
(10) [
(Wi-Fi)] / [ (ISO speed)] /
Up button
(11) [
(Macro)] / Left button
(12) Control dial
(13) [
(Display)] button
(14)
[ ] / [ (Single-image erase)] button
(15) [ (AF frame selector)] / [ ]
button
(16) [
] button
(17) [
(Quick Set menu/Set)] button
(18) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(19) [
(One Shot/Servo)] /
[
(Drive mode)] / [ (Story
Highlights)] / Down button
(20) Speaker
(21) Serial number (Body number)
*1 Used with NFC features (
=
134).
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (
=
164).
z Turning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Part Names
(
21
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
1
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
9
) (
6
) (
14
)
(
15
)
(
12
)(
8
) (
11
)(
10
) (
13
)
(
16
)(
17
)
(
22
) (
23
)
(
18
)(
19
)(
20
)
(1) Lens
(2) Lamp
(3) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(4) Shutter button
(5) Movie button
(6) Strap mount
(7) Front dial
(8) Exposure compensation dial
(9) Power button
(10) Mode dial
(11) Flash
(12) Microphone
(13) External microphone IN terminal
(14) [
(Flash pop up)] switch
(15) Headphone jack
(16)
(N-Mark)*
1
(17) Wi-Fi antenna area
(18) [
(Manual focus)] button
(19) [
(Framing Assist – Seek)]
button
(20) Continuous ring
(21) Tripod socket
(22) Memory card/battery cover
(23) DC coupler terminal cover
5
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics ................................................................ 26
On/Off ..................................................................................... 26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 27
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................27
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 27
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 27
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 28
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation........................... 28
Tilting the Screen Downward .....................................................28
Tilting the Screen Upward .........................................................28
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 29
Using the Quick Set Menu...................................................... 30
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings .............30
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 31
Touch-Screen Operations ..........................................................32
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 32
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 33
Clock ...................................................................................... 34
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ...................................... 35
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 35
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................35
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 37
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................38
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................38
Still Images ............................................................................ 38
Movies ...................................................................................38
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 39
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................40
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................40
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information .............................................................. 2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 13
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 15
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 18
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18
Attaching Accessories ...............................................................18
Holding the Camera ...................................................................19
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................19
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card ...................20
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................20
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 21
Changing the Date and Time .................................................21
Display Language ...................................................................... 22
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 23
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................23
Viewing ......................................................................................24
Erasing Images .....................................................................25
6
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 55
Using the Electronic Level ......................................................... 55
Magnifying the Area in Focus ....................................................55
Checking for Closed Eyes .........................................................56
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 56
Deactivating Image Stabilization ...........................................56
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Recording ................................................................... 57
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 57
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing ...............................57
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......57
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 58
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ...................58
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots .........................58
Other Shooting Modes .................................................... 59
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
(Creative Shot) ....................................................................... 59
Choosing Effects .......................................................................60
Moving Subjects (Sports) ....................................................... 60
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 61
Image Effects (Creative Filters) .............................................. 62
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........62
Adding Artistic Effects ............................................................ 63
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic) ....................................63
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 64
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............64
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................65
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........65
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus) ..................66
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................66
Shooting in Monochrome ...........................................................67
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................41
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 41
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 41
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom) ........................42
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual Zooming
(Framing Assist – Seek) ............................................................42
Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement
(Auto Zoom) ...............................................................................43
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size ............................44
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist) ..............................................................................44
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 45
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................45
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................46
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ....................46
Continuous Shooting .................................................................47
Image Display during Playback .............................................47
Using Face ID......................................................................... 48
Personal Information .................................................................48
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 48
Shooting ....................................................................................49
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................50
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................51
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 52
Image Customization Features .............................................. 52
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 52
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 53
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps ...........53
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................54
For NTSC Video ....................................................................54
For PAL Video ........................................................................54
7
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................80
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................81
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR) ................ 81
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................81
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction) .........................82
Shadow Correction ................................................................ 83
Using the ND Filter ....................................................................83
Image Colors .......................................................................... 83
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) ................................83
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 84
Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................84
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................85
Custom Color.........................................................................85
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 86
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................86
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 86
Fine-Tuning the Focus ...............................................................87
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................88
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) ...................................88
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................89
Choosing the AF Method ........................................................... 89
1-point AF ..............................................................................89
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF) .......................89
+Tracking ............................................................................90
Shooting with Servo AF .............................................................91
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................91
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) ......................... 92
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) .............................. 92
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 93
Flash....................................................................................... 93
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................93
Auto .......................................................................................93
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 67
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) ................. 67
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile) .........................67
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer) .......... 68
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person
(Face Self-Timer) ...................................................................69
Shooting Starry Skies (Star) ...................................................... 70
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape) ..................................................................70
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) ...........................................70
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie) .......................................................71
Adjusting Colors ....................................................................73
Recording Various Movies ...................................................... 74
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode .................................................74
Shooting Still Images during Movie Recording ......................74
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording .... 75
Correcting Severe Camera Shake .............................................75
Sound Settings ..........................................................................76
Adjusting the Recording Volume ...........................................76
Deactivating the Wind Filter ..................................................76
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 76
Recording Short Clips ................................................................76
Playback Effects ....................................................................77
Recording iFrame Movies ..........................................................77
P Mode ............................................................................. 78
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 78
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 79
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 79
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................79
Changing the Metering Method .................................................79
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame ................80
8
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) .................... 108
Histogram ............................................................................108
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display .......................... 108
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ........................................................................109
Viewing by Date ...................................................................109
Checking People Detected in Face ID ..................................... 110
Browsing and Filtering Images ..............................................110
Navigating through Images in an Index ................................... 110
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 111
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions ....................... 111
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images ........................ 112
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 112
Viewing Individual Images in a Group ..................................... 113
Editing Face ID Information ................................................... 114
Changing Names ..................................................................... 114
Erasing Names ........................................................................ 114
Image Viewing Options .........................................................115
Magnifying Images .................................................................. 115
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 115
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................. 115
Protecting Images .................................................................116
Using the Menu ....................................................................... 116
Choosing Images Individually .................................................. 117
Selecting a Range ................................................................... 117
Protecting All Images at Once ................................................. 118
Clearing All Protection at Once ........................................... 118
Erasing Images .....................................................................118
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ............................................. 119
Choosing a Selection Method ............................................. 119
Choosing Images Individually .............................................. 119
Selecting a Range ...............................................................120
On ..........................................................................................93
Slow Synchro ........................................................................94
Off .......................................................................................... 94
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................94
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 95
Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................95
Other Settings ........................................................................ 96
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 96
Capturing in RAW Format .....................................................96
Using the Menu .....................................................................97
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 97
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode ............................................ 98
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 98
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 99
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 99
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb).......................................... 100
Adjusting the Flash Output ................................................... 101
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ................................................................................... 101
Customizing Controls and Display ....................................... 102
Customizing Display Information ............................................. 102
Customizing the Information Displayed ............................... 103
Assigning Functions to Controls .............................................. 103
Saving Shooting Settings ..................................................... 104
Settings that can be saved ..................................................104
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .....105
Playback Mode .............................................................. 106
Viewing ................................................................................. 106
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................107
Switching Display Modes .........................................................108
9
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode ....................................................................134
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 136
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button ...................136
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu ..........................138
Using Another Access Point ....................................................139
Previous Access Points ...........................................................140
Saving Images to a Computer .............................................. 140
Preparing to Register a Computer ........................................... 140
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................140
Installing the Software .........................................................140
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only) ...................................................................141
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ...............................142
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 142
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................142
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................144
Previous Access Points .......................................................145
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 145
Registering Web Services .......................................................145
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................146
Registering Other Web Services .........................................147
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................148
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 149
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 150
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 151
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................151
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................151
Selecting a Range ...............................................................151
Sending Favorite Images ....................................................152
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................152
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........153
Specifying All Images at Once .............................................120
Rotating Images ................................................................... 120
Using the Menu .......................................................................120
Deactivating Auto Rotation ......................................................121
Tagging Images as Favorites ............................................... 121
Using the Menu .......................................................................121
Convenient Control: Assigned Buttons ................................. 122
Convenient Control: Touch Actions ...................................... 123
Using Touch Actions Functions ................................................123
Changing Touch Actions Functions .........................................123
Assignable Functions ..........................................................123
Editing Still Images ............................................................... 124
Resizing Images ......................................................................124
Using the Menu .......................................................................124
Cropping ..................................................................................125
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ..............................126
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ................................ 126
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................127
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 128
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 129
Image Quality of Compressed Movies ................................129
Editing Digest Movies .............................................................. 129
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights) ....................................... 130
Choosing Themes for Albums .............................................130
Adding Background Music to Albums ...................................... 131
Creating Your Own Albums ......................................................132
Wi-Fi Functions ............................................................. 133
Available Wi-Fi Features ...................................................... 133
Sending Images to a Smartphone ........................................ 134
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone .............134
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Adding Comments ................................................................... 153
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 153
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 153
Preparing the Camera .........................................................153
Preparing the Computer ......................................................154
Sending Images .......................................................................154
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone.....155
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 155
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................155
Shooting Remotely ..................................................................156
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 157
Editing Connection Information ...............................................157
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................157
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................157
Changing the Camera Nickname ........................................158
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................158
Setting Menu .................................................................. 159
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 159
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 159
File Numbering ........................................................................159
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 160
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 160
Changing the Video System ....................................................160
Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 161
Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 161
Switching the Color of Screen Information ..............................161
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................161
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................162
Screen Brightness ...................................................................162
World Clock .............................................................................162
Changing the Date and Time ...................................................163
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 163
Display Language .................................................................... 163
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................163
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................163
Customizing Sounds ................................................................164
Start-Up Screen ....................................................................... 164
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................164
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel ..........................................164
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................164
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 164
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................165
Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................165
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 165
Restoring Default Camera Settings ......................................... 165
Accessories ................................................................... 166
System Map ......................................................................... 167
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 168
Power Supplies ........................................................................168
Flash Units ...............................................................................168
Other Accessories ...................................................................168
Printers ....................................................................................169
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 169
Playback on a TV ....................................................................169
Powering the Camera with Household Power ......................... 170
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately) ....................................... 171
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately) .....................................172
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately) ..............................172
Using the Hot Shoe .................................................................173
Using an Electronic Viewnder (Sold Separately) ...................173
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) ..............................175
Speedlite EX Series ............................................................175
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately) .............. 176
11
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately) .................................................................176
Using an External Microphone ................................................177
Using Headphones (Sold Separately) .....................................177
Using the Software ............................................................... 178
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 178
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................178
Installing the Software .........................................................178
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 178
Printing Images .................................................................... 180
Easy Print ................................................................................180
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 181
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................181
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............182
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 182
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................182
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 183
Movie Printing Options ........................................................183
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................183
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................183
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................184
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 184
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................184
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................185
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 185
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................185
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................185
Adding Images Individually ..................................................185
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................186
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................186
Appendix ........................................................................ 187
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 187
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 191
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 193
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................193
Battery Level .......................................................................193
Playback (Detailed Information Display) ..................................194
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................194
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 195
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................195
Quick Set Menu .......................................................................197
Shooting Tab ............................................................................200
[
1] Tab .............................................................................200
[
2] Tab .............................................................................201
[
3] Tab .............................................................................203
[
4] Tab .............................................................................204
[
5] Tab .............................................................................205
[
6] Tab .............................................................................206
[
7] Tab .............................................................................207
[
8] Tab .............................................................................208
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 209
My Menu Tab ...........................................................................209
Playback Tab ...........................................................................209
Print Tab ..................................................................................210
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 210
Specications ........................................................................211
Camera Specications ............................................................. 211
Wi-Fi .................................................................................... 211
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent) .................... 211
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time .............. 212
Number of Shots per Memory Card ....................................212
Recording Time per Memory Card ......................................213
12
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Flash Range ........................................................................213
Shooting Range ...................................................................213
Continuous Shooting Speed ................................................213
Shutter Speed .....................................................................214
Aperture ...............................................................................214
Battery Pack NB-10L ........................................................... 214
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE .....................................214
Index..................................................................................... 215
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 217
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 217
Security Precautions ................................................................217
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................218
Disclaimer ............................................................................219
13
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
35,
=
37
● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
-
=
59
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
61)
Against Snow
(
=
61)
Matching specic scenes
Sports
(
=
60)
Night Scenes
(
=
61)
Fireworks
(
=
61)
Starry Skies
(
=
70)
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
(
=
62)
Poster Effect
(
=
62)
“Aged” Photos
(
=
63)
Fish-Eye Effect
(
=
64)
Miniature Effect
(
=
64)
Toy Camera Effect
(
=
65)
Background Defocus
(
=
66)
Soft Focus
(
=
66)
Monochrome
(
=
67)
● Focus on faces
-
=
35,
=
61,
=
90,
=
92
● Without using the ash (Flash Off)
-
=
35
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
45,
=
69
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
37
14
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Use Wi-Fi Functions
● Send images to a smartphone
-
=
134
● Share images online
-
=
145
● Send images to a computer
-
=
153
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
106
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
115
● On a TV
-
=
169
● On a computer
-
=
178
● Browse through images quickly
-
=
110
● Erase images
-
=
118
● Create an album automatically
-
=
130
Shoot/View Movies
● Shoot movies
-
=
35,
=
74,
=
101
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
106
Print
● Print pictures
-
=
180
Save
● Save images to a computer via a cable
-
=
178
15
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
● Do not look through the viewnder (if your model has one) at intense
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense articial
light source.
This could damage your eyesight.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
Safety Precautions
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
● Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the ash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the ash.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
The hot shoe cover is dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs, contact a
doctor immediately.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
16
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
● When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
17
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
18
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching Accessories
1
Attach the strap.
z Attach the included strap to the camera
as shown.
z On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
2
Attach the lens cap.
z Remove the lens cap from the lens and
attach the lens cap cord to the strap.
z Always remove the lens cap before
turning the camera on. Try clipping the
lens cap to the neck strap when the cap
is not in use.
z Keep the lens cap on the lens when the
camera is not in use.
(
1
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
Basic Guide
Basic Operations
19
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
3
Remove the battery pack.
z After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
212).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
with
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
(
1
)
(
2
)
Holding the Camera
z Place the strap around your neck.
z When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
z Remove the cover from the battery pack,
align the marks on the battery pack
and charger, and insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
z CB-2LC: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
z CB-2LCE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
z The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
z When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
CB-2LC
CB-2LCE
20
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
4
Close the cover.
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (
=
212).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
z Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
z The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
z Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
z The memory card will pop up.
(
1
)
(
2
)
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
160).
1
Open the cover.
z Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
2
Insert the battery pack.
z Holding the battery pack with the terminals
in the position shown, hold the battery
lock toward (1) and insert the battery pack
toward (2) until the lock clicks shut.
z If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
z Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
z Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
z Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
21
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [
] dial.
● You can also set the date and time by touching the desired option
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [
][ ], followed
by [
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
touching [
][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [ ].
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ 2] tab.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the power button.
z The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2
Set the date and time.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date and time.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
z To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
22
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
z Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ 3] tab.
● You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
3
Change the date and time.
z Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
21) to adjust the settings.
z Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
adapter kit (sold separately,
=
168), even if the camera is left
off.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
21).
23
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] is displayed, move
the [
] switch to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the power button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
24
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [
] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
z Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
z To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
z Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish recording.
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(
1
)
25
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
119).
● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
123).
3
Play movies.
z Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
z Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [
] is displayed.
z To adjust the volume, press the [
][ ]
buttons during playback.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, quickly drag up or down across the screen during
playback.
26
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
On/Off
Shooting Mode
z Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
z To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
z To turn the camera off, press the [
]
button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
27).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
27
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.)
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to shoot.)
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(
=
27).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of
inactivity.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (
=
162).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
133), or when connected to a computer
(
=
178).
28
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how
you are shooting.
Tilting the Screen Downward
z Pull the top of the screen down.
z The screen can be opened to about 45°.
Tilting the Screen Upward
z Lift the bottom of the screen up until it
clicks (1), slide the top of the screen
down (2), and then lift the bottom of the
screen up again (3).
z The screen can be opened to about 180°.
z When including yourself in shots, you
can view a mirror image of yourself by
rotating the screen around toward the
front of the camera.
z When nished, tilt the screen back to
lower it (4), and then slide it up until it
clicks (5).
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
5
)
(
4
)
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
6
)
(
5
)
(
4
)
(
7
)
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
23,
=
35,
=
37).
(2) Creative Shot Mode
See several effects applied to
each shot automatically (
=
59).
(3) Sports Mode
Shoot continuously as the camera
focuses on moving subjects
(
=
60).
(4) P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (
=
78,
=
98).
(5) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (
=
74,
=
101).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(6) Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
when shooting (
=
62).
(7) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
specic scenes (
=
61).
29
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to show or hide shooting information, grid lines,
or the electronic level.
To congure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab ►
[Shooting information display] (
=
102).
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
108).
● When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
● Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
● To cancel reverse display, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 1] tab
► [Reverse Disp.] ► [Off].
30
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
165).
● You can also exit by choosing [
] in the menu items and
pressing the [
] button.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure
Settings
z Touch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
z Touch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
z To return to the previous screen, touch
the [
] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [
] icon by touching
[ ].
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [
] icon by touching
[ ].
Using the Quick Set Menu
Congure commonly used functions in the (Quick Set) menu.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
197).
1
Access the menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
z Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
or [ ] dial to choose an option.
z Options labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
z Options labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
4
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button.
z The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
(
1
) (
2
)
31
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
3
Choose a menu item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button.
z For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [
] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
z To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
4
Choose an option.
z When options are listed vertically, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
z When options are listed horizontally,
press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
5
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button to conrm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
z Press the [
] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
165).
● Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
playback mode (
=
200 –
=
209).
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
z Tabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([ ]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identied in this
manual by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
z Move the zoom lever to choose the
function tab, and then press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
the page tab.
32
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (
=
48),
Wi-Fi connections (
=
142), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
z Touch the characters to enter them.
z The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
z Touch [ ][ ].
Entering Line Breaks
z Touch [ ].
Switching Input Modes
z To switch to numbers or symbols, touch
[ ].
z Touch [
] to enter capital letters.
z Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Deleting Characters
z To delete the previous character, either
touch [ ] or press the [ ] button.
z Touching and holding [
] will delete ve
characters at a time.
(
1
)
Touch-Screen Operations
● To choose tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu screen,
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
● Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
● To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the menu item, and then touch to
choose the option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
].
● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● To dismiss the menu, press the [
] button again.
33
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green
On
Connected to a computer (
=
178), or display
off (
=
27,
=
161,
=
162)
Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures (
=
98,
=
99), or connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
z Press the [ ] button.
● Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [
] dial to select characters or icons, and
then pressing the [
] button. You can also move the cursor by
turning the [
] dial. To return to the previous screen, press the
[
] button.
34
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Clock
You can check the current time.
z Press and hold the [
] button.
z The current time appears.
z If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to change the display
color.
z Press the [
] button again to cancel the
clock display.
● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the power button to display the clock.
35
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the power button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
the upper left of the screen (
=
39,
=
40).
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
36
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is
played, and in low-light conditions when you
have raised the ash, it res automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
z To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
z When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
(
1
)
3
Compose the shot.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed, along with the range of focus
(2).)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
z Several frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] is displayed, move
the [
] switch to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
(
1
)
(
2
)
37
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Shoot.
z Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
35) to shoot a still image.
z The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
● Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [ ] for
NTSC or [
] for PAL and cannot be changed (
=
160).
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (
=
164).
● Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
116).
- Daylight saving time (
=
21) or time zone (
=
162) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
159).
● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 7] tab ►
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
129).
3) Finish recording.
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
z Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
● The ash ring during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
35) and choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot.
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (
=
35) to compose the shot and
focus.
z For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
38
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
58).
Movies
● Keep your ngers away from the microphone (1) while shooting
movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being
recorded or may cause the recording to sound mufed.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, set Dynamic IS to [Low] (
=
57).
(
1
)
● Audio is recorded in stereo.
● During movie recording, lens operating noises from auto focusing
may also be recorded. If you prefer not to record sound, choose
MENU (
=
31) ► [ 8] tab ► [Sound rec.] ► [Disable].
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (
=
109).
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down,
the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press
the [
] button and choose [Mute] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [Off].
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to
the subject. For details on the ash range, see “Flash Range”
(
=
213).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (
=
213).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
● The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and
Babies (Sleeping) icons (
=
39) are displayed.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
39
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
● In [
] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [
] (
=
40,
=
47) and when
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
(
=
53).
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the ash is set to [
].
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (
=
48). Conrm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (
=
21).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
78) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (
=
40).
Subject
Background
Normal Backlit Dark*
1
Sunsets Spotlights
People
*
2
*
3
–
Moving People
*
3
*
3
– – –
Shadows on Face
*
2
– – – –
Smiling
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping
*
2
*
3
– – –
Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Smiling Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping Babies
*
2
*
3
– – –
Moving Children
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Subjects
*
2
*
3
Other Moving Subjects
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*
2
*
3
– –
*1 Tripod Used
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
40
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [ ]
is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is
used (Hybrid IS).
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
56). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
● In [
] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is
displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If
the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed
when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or
[ ] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the ash will not re, and
the shutter sound will not be played.
Children
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst
shot.
● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
and then select [
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
] dial).
41
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 100x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
z Hold the lever until zooming stops.
z Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
z The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
z (1) is the current zoom factor.
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change
depending on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (
=
96), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
(
1
)
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
78) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
● To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [
] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode.
42
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual
Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek)
Still Images
Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in, you can nd it more easily
by temporarily zooming out.
1
Look for the lost subject.
z Press and hold the [ ] button.
z The camera zooms out and displays
a white frame around the area shown
before you pressed the [
] button.
2
Reacquire the subject.
z Aim the camera so that the subject enters
the white frame, and then release the
[ ] button.
z The previous magnication is now
restored, so that the area within the white
frame lls the screen again.
● Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is
zoomed out.
● During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you
press the [
] button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and
camera operating sounds are recorded.
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 2] tab
► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 24 – 600 mm (35mm lm
equivalent).
z Turn the [
] dial clockwise until it
clicks to change the focal length from
24 mm to 28 mm. Turn the [ ] dial
clockwise to zoom in or counterclockwise
to zoom out.
● Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn
the [
] dial.
● When using the digital zoom (
=
41), turning the [ ] dial
clockwise will not change the zoom factor. However, turning the
[
] dial counterclockwise will set the focal length to 600 mm.
43
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
Shoot.
z Auto zooming continues even after you
shoot, and the frames are still displayed.
z To cancel auto zooming, press the [
]
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.
● A face may not be displayed at a constant size relative to the
screen at some zoom factors, or if the person’s head is tilted or
facing the camera indirectly.
● During movie recording, a changed zoom factor and camera
operating sounds are recorded.
● When
Auto is on, some shooting information is not displayed,
and some shooting settings cannot be congured.
● Auto zooming to keep multiple subjects on the screen is not
performed during movie recording, even if faces are detected.
● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever, but the original zoom
factor will be restored in a few seconds after you release the
lever.
● Auto zooming is not performed during continuous shooting.
● If multiple faces are detected in step 2, you can change the
face used as the main subject by touching the face or pressing
the [
] button. However, the [ ] button cannot be used for
selection during movie recording.
● When a detected subject moves toward the edge of the screen,
the camera zooms out to keep the subject on the screen.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed after you press the shutter
button all the way down in self-timer mode (
=
45).
● The camera prioritizes zooming to keep subjects on the screen.
For this reason, it may not be possible to maintain a constant
face display size, depending on subject movement and shooting
conditions.
● When no face is detected, the camera zooms to a certain level
and stops zooming until a face is detected.
● If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1,
press the shutter button all the way down.
● You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera reverts to when
you release the [
] button by moving the zoom lever to resize
the white frame while you hold the [
] button.
● To adjust the area displayed when the [
] button is pressed,
access MENU (
=
31) ► [ 7] tab ► [ Display Area], and
choose one of the three options.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after
you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode
(
=
45).
Auto Zooming in Response to Subject
Movement (Auto Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep a detected face
(
=
90) at a constant size. If the person moves closer, the camera
automatically zooms out, and vice versa. This size can also be adjusted,
as needed.
1
Enter [ ] Auto mode.
z Press and release the [ ] button quickly.
z [
] is displayed.
z A white frame is displayed around the
detected face, and the camera zooms
in and out to keep the subject on the
screen.
z When multiple faces are detected, a
white frame is displayed around the main
subject’s face and up to two gray frames
around other faces, as the camera zooms
to keep these subjects on the screen.
44
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto
Zooming (Seek Assist)
Still Images
Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in and move the camera to
look for it, the camera detects this movement and automatically zooms
out, which makes it easier to nd the subject.
1
Enter [ ] Auto mode (=
43).
2
Look for the lost subject.
z When you move the camera to look for
the subject, the camera zooms out to
help you nd it.
3
Reacquire the subject.
z Once you nd the subject and stop
moving the camera, the camera zooms
in again.
4
Shoot.
z To cancel this mode, press the [ ]
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size
z When Auto is on, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
the desired option.
z The camera zooms automatically to keep
faces at the specied size.
Auto
Auto zoom to prevent subjects from moving off the
screen.
When multiple faces are detected, the camera zooms to
keep these subjects on the screen.
Face
Keep faces large enough to show facial expressions
clearly.
Upper Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s upper
body.
Whole Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s entire
body.
Manual
Keep faces at the size specied by moving the zoom
lever. Release the zoom lever once the desired size
has been obtained.
● The face size can also be adjusted in MENU (
=
31) ► [ 7]
tab ► [
Auto Settings] ► [ Auto Zoom]. You can choose
[Off] to deactivate this feature and use only the feature described
in “Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming (Seek Assist)”
(
=
44).
● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever when [Face], [Upper
Body], or [Whole Body] is selected, but the original zoom factor
will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever.
● You can clear your specied face size during movie recording by
pressing the [
] button.
● When Auto is on, you can also choose options by touching
[
][ ].
45
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
Shoot.
z For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
z For Movies: Press the movie button.
z Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
z Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
z To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
z Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
45) and choose [ ].
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
45) to shoot.
● The camera does not zoom out automatically while [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, even if you move the camera.
● When the feature described in “Auto Zooming in Response to
Subject Movement (Auto Zoom)” (
=
43) is deactivated, [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, and the camera automatically
zooms out when moved.
● Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
● To deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in
“Auto Zooming in Response to Subject Movement (Auto Zoom)”
(
=
43), choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 7] tab ► [ Auto
Settings] ► [Seek Assist] ► [Off].
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
46
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1
Enable touch-shutter function.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
31).
2
Shoot.
z Touch the subject on the screen, and
then lift your nger immediately.
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z To cancel touch shutter, choose [Off] in
step 1.
● Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [
].
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
z Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
45), choose [ ] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
45) to shoot.
● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specied delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
47
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● In [ ] mode, you can also choose items in step 1 by
pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
Image Display during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and only the rst image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the
screen.
● If you erase a grouped image (
=
118), all images in the group
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
● Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
113) and
ungrouped (
=
113).
● Protecting (
=
116) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played
back using Image Search (
=
110). In this case, images are
temporarily ungrouped.
● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (
=
114), magnifying (
=
115),
tagging as favorites (
=
121), editing (
=
124), printing
(
=
180), setting up individual image printing (
=
184), or
adding to a photobook (
=
185). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (
=
113) or cancel grouping
(
=
113) rst.
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting
Speed” (
=
213).
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, turn the [ ] dial
to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
45).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● Multi-area White Balance (
=
35) is not available. Also note that
these features are not available.
- [Hg Lamp Corr.] (
=
53)
- [Blink Detection] (
=
56)
● With Touch Shutter (
=
46), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during continuous
shooting remain constant, after they are determined for the rst shot.
48
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Register face information.
z Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
z A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
z If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specic registered
person among a large number of images (
=
111).
Personal Information
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (
=
52).
49
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
5
Continue registering face
information.
z To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● The ash will not re when following step 2.
● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(
=
39) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not lled all 5 face info slots (
=
48).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
z When you point the camera toward
people, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
z Shoot.
z Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
z After [Register?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.
3
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
=
32).
z To register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
4
Save the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
z After a message is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
50
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
48), choose [Check/
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person whose information you want
to check or edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Check or edit the information as
needed.
z To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Prole] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (
=
48).
z To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press
the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button
on the screen displayed, choose face
information to erase by pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ]
dial, and then press the [ ] button. After
[Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (
=
114).
● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (
=
48).
● Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
[Shooting Info] check box in “Customizing the Information
Displayed” (
=
103) so that the names are not displayed.
● If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [
2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose
[Off].
● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (
=
108).
● In [
] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
● Names recorded in continuous shooting (
=
47) continue to be
recorded in the same position as the rst shot, even if subjects
move.
51
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Register face information.
z Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
48) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are lled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, rst erase
unwanted existing info (
=
50), and then register new face
information (
=
48) as needed.
● Even if you change names in [Edit Prole], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
lled.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
48), choose [Add Face
Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[ ] button.
z If ve items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
z If less than ve items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
52
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Used for display on standard-denition televisions or similar display
devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series
sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
● Not available in [ ] mode.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
► [
1] tab ► [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
z Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
48) and choose [Erase
Info].
2
Choose a person to erase their
information.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person to erase, and
then press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (
=
110), overwrite their info (
=
114), or
search images for them (
=
111).
● You can also erase names in image information (
=
114).
53
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Hg
Lamp Corr.] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
31).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● After you are nished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● In continuous shooting (
=
47), this setting is set to [Off] and
cannot be changed.
Changing Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image quality. For guidelines on how many of
each kind of image can t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per
Memory Card” (
=
212).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting Based on Paper Size
(for 3:2 Images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
● Not available in [ ] mode.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
► [
1] tab ► [Image quality].
54
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
For PAL Video
Image
Quality
Number of Recording
Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 50.00 fps
For shooting in Full
HD.
1920 x 1080 25.00 fps
1280 x 720 25.00 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 25.00 fps
For shooting in
standard denition
● Black bars (displayed on the left and right in [ ] and
[
] modes and on the top and bottom in [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[
] modes) indicate image areas not recorded.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
► [
8] tab ► [Movie Quality].
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
automatically based on the NTSC or PAL setting (
=
160). For guidelines
on the maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will t on
a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (
=
213).
z Press the [
] button, choose the movie
quality menu item, and then choose the
desired option (
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
For NTSC Video
Image
Quality
Number of Recording
Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 59.94 fps
For shooting in Full
HD. [
] enables
movies with smoother
motion
1920 x 1080 29.97 fps
1920 x 1080 23.98 fps
1280 x 720 29.97 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 29.97 fps
For shooting in
standard denition
55
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
1
Congure the settings.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
31).
2
Check the focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnied.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● The area in focus is not magnied in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
- When digital zoom is used (
=
41)
- When a TV is used as a display (
=
169)
● Not available in [
] mode.
Helpful Shooting Features
Using the Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
An electronic level can be displayed on the screen when shooting as a
guideline to determine if the camera is level.
1
Display the electronic level.
z Press the [ ] button to display the
electronic level.
2
Level the camera as needed.
z Level the camera so that the center of the
electronic level is green.
● If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
[
] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
information display].
● Tilting the camera too far forward or backward will prevent you
from using the electronic level, which will turn gray.
● The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
● If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
● Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
level the camera (
=
161).
● Not available in [
] mode.
56
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
desired option (
=
31).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
40).
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
Checking for Closed Eyes
Still Images
Movies
[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the [ 7] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
31).
2
Shoot.
z [ ] ashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● When you have specied multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the nal shot.
● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
Time] (
=
58).
● This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [
]
mode (
=
40).
● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode
(
=
47).
57
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen” (
=
31).
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
z Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
31).
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Flash Control] screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off] (
=
31).
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Recording
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant camera
shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization.
z Follow step 1 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
56) to access the [IS
Settings] screen.
z Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (
=
31).
● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(
=
56).
● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
58
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=
58).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Display Info], and then choose
the desired option (
=
31).
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Off Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (
=
194).
● When [Display Time] (
=
58) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
● By pressing the [
] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images by pressing the [
] button.
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[ 2] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Display Time], and then choose
the desired option (
=
31).
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while
the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
59
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each
Shot (Creative Shot)
Still Images
Movies
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
z After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
z To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [
] button. For full-screen display in
this state, choose an image by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button.
z To return to the original display, press the
[
] button.
● Shooting will take some time when the ash res, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
● The six images are managed together as a group (
=
113).
● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
60
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Moving Subjects (Sports)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Focus.
z While you are pressing the shutter button
halfway, the camera will continue to
adjust focus and image brightness where
the blue frame is displayed.
3
Shoot.
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
80) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● For details on the shooting range in [
] mode, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
213).
● There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can
shoot again. Note that some types of memory cards may delay
your next shot even longer.
● Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions,
camera settings, and the zoom position.
Choosing Effects
Still Images
Movies
You can choose effects for images captured in [ ] mode.
z After choosing [
] mode, turn the [ ]
dial to choose the effect.
Auto
All effects
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Images are generated in one color
Special
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Natural
Subdued, natural-looking images
61
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds
(Snow)
Still Images
Movies
z Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
z Vivid shots of reworks.
● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
● In [
] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
80) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
● In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
● In [
] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
56).
● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [
] mode will give better results (
=
35).
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
30).
3
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
z Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night Scene)
Still Images
Movies
z Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
z A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
62
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
62) and choose
[ ].
2
Shoot.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
30).
3
Shoot.
Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
z Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
z Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots rst, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
63
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old
photographs. Choose from ve effect levels.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
62) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging
effect is not shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see
the effect (
=
106).
● The image aging effect is not shown in movies.
● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (
=
56).
● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
● [
] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway
in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal
image brightness.
Adding Artistic Effects
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
62) and choose
[ ].
z Turn the [
] dial to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
64
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
62) and choose
[ ].
z A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [
] dial to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose the speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
62) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
65
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
62) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color
tone.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [
][ ] buttons.
● To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[
][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movie image quality is [
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
52). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button on the
screens in steps 2 and 3, or while shooting movies.
● You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
66
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
62) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects
and subject- and scene-based image processing.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
62) and choose
[ ].
2
Shoot.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
Two consecutive images are captured
when you press the shutter button all the
way down.
z A blinking [
] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
● For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the
subject, and ensure ample distance between the subject and
background.
● There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again.
● To adjust the effect level, turn the [
] dial.
67
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Auto Shooting after Face Detection
(Smart Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile)
Still Images
Movies
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
61) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2
Aim the camera at a person.
z Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
z To pause smile detection, press the [
]
button. Press the [ ] button again to
resume detection.
● Switch to another mode when you nish shooting, or the camera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
Shooting in Monochrome
Still Images
Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
62) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color
tone.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
68
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
z The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4
Face the camera and wink.
z The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as
a wink.
● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds
later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
56) is only
available for the nal shot.
● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
61), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the
camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
56) is only
available for the nal shot.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
61), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer)
Still Images
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
61) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
z On the screen, touch the face of the
person who will wink to choose it (Touch
AF), and then press the shutter button
halfway.
z Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
69
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
4
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
z After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the ash res, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
56) is only
available for the nal shot.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
61), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person
(Face Self-Timer)
Still Images
Movies
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(
=
90). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
61) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
z Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
z The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
70
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
161) before shooting.
● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ►
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
86) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
61), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Still Images
Movies
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
61) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
Still Images
Movies
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
61) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3
Shoot.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
71
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images
Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specied
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
61) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Congure movie settings.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
the desired option.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
2
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose the
shooting duration.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briey, and
then shooting begins.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note that
cancellation may take up to about 60
seconds.
● If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
161) before shooting.
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
86) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
61), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
72
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate
(for a one-hour session)
Interval between Shots
Frame Rate
Playback Time
NTSC PAL
15 sec.
16 sec.
15 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
4 sec.
1 min.
4 sec.
1 min.
2 sec.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
● A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
4
Check the brightness.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
z Switch to Playback mode (
=
106) and
check image brightness.
z To adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level on the shooting screen.
Check brightness again by taking another
shot.
5
Shoot.
z Press the movie button. [Busy] is displayed
briey, and then shooting begins.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 60 seconds.
z The camera operates in Eco mode
(
=
161) while shooting.
Item Options Details
Effect
Choose movie effects,
such as star trails.
Shot Interval 15 sec., 30 sec., 1 min.
Choose the interval
between each shot.
Frame Rate
, (NTSC)
, (PAL)
Choose the movie frame
rate.
Shooting Time
60 min., 90 min.,
120 min., Unlimited
Choose the length of
the recording session.
To record until the
battery runs out, choose
[Unlimited].
73
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Adjusting Colors
Still Images
Movies
Colors can be manually adjusted in [ ] mode.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Choose [ ] (
=
70), [ ] (
=
70), or
[ ] (
=
71).
2
Choose color adjustment.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
3
Adjust the setting.
z Turn the [ ] dial or press the [ ][ ]
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● B represents blue and A, amber.
● Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
]
button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (
=
84).
● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
● Advanced settings can be accessed by touching [
] when the
screen in step 2 is displayed (
=
84).
● Sound is not recorded.
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [
2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
161) before shooting.
● You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].
● To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose
MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Save Stills] ► [On]. Note
that these individual images are managed as a single group, and
during playback, only the rst image is displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [
] is displayed in the upper left
of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (
=
118), all images
in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
86) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
● Even if you specify [Unlimited] in [Shooting Time] in step 2 and
use an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
168), shooting will
stop after about 8 hours, at most.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
61), touching [ ] to access
the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the same
option or [
].
74
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting Still Images during Movie Recording
Still Images
Movies
Shoot still images during movie recording as follows.
1
While shooting a movie, focus on a
subject.
z Make sure that [ ] is displayed, and
then press the shutter button halfway.
z Focus and exposure are now readjusted.
(However, the camera does not beep.)
z Movie recording will continue.
2
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z Your shot will be recorded.
● Shooting still images during movie recording may not be possible
when the memory card’s recording speed is slow, or when there is
not enough free internal memory.
- [
] (blinking): Image processing for recording is in progress.
You can shoot when the icon stops blinking.
- [
]: Still images cannot be shot.
In [
] mode, [ ] is displayed during movie recording, and still
images cannot be shot.
● When still images are captured during movie recording, the still
image and shutter sound are included in the movie.
● The ash does not re.
● Movie recording may stop if shooting still images lls up the
internal memory.
Recording Various Movies
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
195).
3
Shoot.
z Press the movie button.
z To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] and
turning the [
] ring while [ ] is displayed.
75
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and
subjects are further enlarged.
z Follow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Recording” (
=
57) to choose
[High].
● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
● During recording of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[
], [ ] or [ ] movies (with at aspect ratio of
16:9), still images will have an aspect ratio of [
].
● During recording of [
] or [ ] movies (with at
aspect ratio of 4:3), still images will have an aspect ratio of [
].
● [
] images are shot when movie and still image aspect ratios do
not match.
● The ISO speed will be [AUTO].
● When [Dynamic IS] is set to [Standard] (
=
57), a larger area is
captured than for movies.
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording
Still Images
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-
stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Touch [ ] to lock the exposure.
z To unlock the exposure, touch [
] again.
2
Adjust the exposure.
z Turn the exposure compensation dial.
3
Shoot (=
74).
76
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Using the Attenuator
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.
However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.
z Access the [Sound rec.] screen as
described in step 1 of “Adjusting the
Recording Volume” (
=
76).
z Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator], and then
press the [
] button.
z Choose [Attenuator], and then choose
[Auto] or [On] (
=
31).
Recording Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (
=
130).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Specify the shooting time and
playback effect.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Turn the [
] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and turn the [ ] dial to set
the playback effect (
=
77).
3
Shoot (=
74).
z A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
Sound Settings
Still Images
Movies
Adjusting the Recording Volume
Although the recording level (volume) is automatically adjusted to reduce
distortion, you can set the level manually to suit the shooting scene.
1
Access the [Sound rec.] screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Sound rec.] on the [ 8] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Sound rec.], and then choose
[Manual] (
=
31).
z Choose [Level] and set the desired
recording level.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Auto].
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In
this case, you can deactivate the wind lter.
z Access the [Sound rec.] screen as
described in step 1 of “Adjusting the
Recording Volume” (
=
76).
z Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator], and then
press the [
] button.
z Choose [Wind Filter], and then choose
[Off] (
=
31).
77
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Effects
2x
Record a clip that is played back in fast motion.
1x
Record a clip that is played back at normal speed.
1/2x
Record a clip that is played back in slow motion.
Record a clip that is played back normally before it appears
to be rewound two seconds to show a replay of the last part.
During recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
● Sound is not recorded in these clips.
● The movie quality is [
] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)
(
=
54,
=
54) and cannot be changed.
Recording iFrame Movies
Still Images
Movies
Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices.
1
Choose [ ].
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Shoot (=
74).
● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
● The movie quality is [
] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)
(
=
54,
=
54) and cannot be changed.
78
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
79 – =
97), and then shoot.
● If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
80) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark,
=
93),
which may enable optimum exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some
menu (
=
30) and MENU
(
=
31) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [
] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [
], make sure the function is available in that mode
(
=
195).
79
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● AE: Auto Exposure
● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] dial
(Program Shift).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE Point
frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to
the AF frame (
=
80).
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3.
z As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
z [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
z To unlock AE, press the [
] button again.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
80
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ] button and turn the [ ]
dial to choose an ISO speed.
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
AUTO
Automatically adjusts
the ISO speed to suit
the shooting mode and
conditions.
125, 160, 200
For shooting outdoors in
fair weather.
250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800
For shooting in cloudy
conditions, or at twilight.
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200,
4000, 5000, 6400
For shooting night scenes,
or in dark rooms.
8000, 10000, 12800
Choose a higher ISO speed for higher sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces
subject and camera shake and increases the ash range.
However, shots may look grainy.
● You can also set the ISO speed by accessing MENU (
=
31) ►
[
5] tab ► [ISO speed] ► [ISO Speed].
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Still Images
Movies
1
Set the metering method to [ ].
z Follow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (
=
79) to choose
[ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (
=
31).
z The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(
=
89).
● Not available when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] (
=
90).
81
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
z Press the [
] button, choose [High
ISO NR] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
31).
● Not available when images are captured in RAW format
(
=
96).
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specied
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specied in a range of
three levels.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ISO
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Choose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the
[
] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
31).
● You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen by pressing
the [
] button when choosing the ISO speed via the [ ]
button.
82
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Still Images
Movies
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out,
as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Options Details
Available ISO Speed
(
=
80)
–
Automatic adjustment to prevent
washed-out highlights
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
Tone down highlights by about
200% relative to the brightness
level of [ ].
[AUTO], [250] – [6400]
● ISO speed (
=
80) will be adjusted to a speed within the
supported range if you have specied a value outside the
supported range indicated here.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to adjust the setting.
● AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (
=
93).
● Continuous shooting (
=
47) is not available in this mode.
● If exposure compensation is already in use (
=
79), the value
specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
● You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
(
=
79) is displayed.
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
46).
● In [Blink Detection] mode (
=
56), this function is only available
for the nal shot.
● You can also congure this setting by touching or dragging the
bar on the setting screen in step 2 to specify a value and then
touching [
].
83
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Image Colors
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting.
Fluorescent For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight uorescent lighting.
Flash For shooting with the ash.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
84).
Shadow Correction
Still Images
Movies
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
Using the ND Filter
To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the
ND lter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to
3 stops).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS
Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the
camera (
=
56).
● ND: Neutral Density
84
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
Congure advanced settings.
z To congure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust the
correction level by turning the [ ] or
[ ] dial or pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons.
z To reset the correction level, press the
[
] button.
z Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
● The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps
in “Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)” (
=
83)), but
correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance
data.
● B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
● You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
adjustment screen is accessed simply by turning the [
] or
[
] dial (
=
103).
● One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7
mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter
density)
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
► [
6] tab ► [WB Correction].
● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
● You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [
] in
step 1.
● On the screen in step 2, you can touch [
] to restore the
original level and touch [
] to return to the shooting screen.
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
83) to
choose [ ] or [ ].
z Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [
] button.
z The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
● You can also record white balance data on the screen above by
touching [
].
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter or color-
compensating lter.
1
Congure the setting.
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
83) to
choose [ ].
z Turn the [
] dial to adjust the correction
level for B and A.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
85
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● White balance (
=
83) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
● With [
] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
Custom Color
Still Images
Movies
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (
=
85) to
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then specify the value by
turning the [ ] dial.
z For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
z Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
● You can also specify a value by touching or dragging the bar.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
My Colors Off
–
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green,
and Vivid Red to produce intense yet natural-
looking colors resembling images on positive lm.
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains,
foliage, and other green subjects more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and
other qualities as desired (
=
85).
86
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
position you specied. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
213).
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button.
z [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2
Specify the general focal position.
z Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnied display, turn
the [ ] ring or [ ] dial to specify the
general focal position, and then press the
[ ] button.
z To adjust the magnication, press the
[
] button.
z During magnied display, you can move
the focusing frame by pressing the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera ne-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
z To cancel this mode, press the [
]
button.
(
1
)
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (
=
213).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
45).
● You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [
], and then touching it again.
87
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Fine-Tuning the Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can ne-tune the focus after autofocusing by turning the continuous ring.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[AF+MF] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
31).
2
Focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
z Turn the [ ] ring. Referring to the on-
screen MF indicator bar (which shows
the distance and focal position) and the
magnied display area, turn the [ ] ring
to adjust the focus.
z To enlarge or reduce the magnied
display, press the [
] button.
z To cancel focusing, release the shutter
button.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● When you focus manually, the AF method (
=
89) is [1-point
AF] and AF frame size (
=
89) is [Normal], and these settings
cannot be changed.
● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (
=
41) or
digital tele-converter (
=
89), or when using a TV as a display
(
=
169), but the magnied display will not appear.
● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
● You can enlarge or hide the magnied display area by adjusting
MENU (
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
● To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ►
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
● You can move the focusing frame by dragging on the screen in
step 2.
88
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
● Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (
=
93).
● Continuous shooting (
=
47) is not available in this mode.
● You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
(
=
86).
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
46).
● In [Blink Detection] mode (
=
56), this function is only available
for the nal shot.
● You can also congure this setting by touching or dragging the
bar on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching
[
].
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,
choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]
(
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
31).
● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
rst one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specied focus can be set in three levels.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ ] (
=
31).
89
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
1-point AF
Still Images
Movies
The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable
focusing. You can also move the frame by touching the screen (
=
92).
● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
button halfway with [AF-Point Zoom] (
=
55) set to [On].
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)
Still Images
Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
method to [1-point AF].
1
Move the AF frame.
z Touch the screen. An AF frame is displayed
in orange where you touched (Touch AF).
z Turn the [ ] or [ ] dial to move the
AF frame, and press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons to ne-tune the position.
z To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [
]
button.
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
31).
z The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following
step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (
=
41).
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images
Movies
Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
31).
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
31)
► [
3] tab ► [AF method].
90
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
+Tracking
Still Images
Movies
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
● When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are
displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shutter button
halfway will display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that
the maximum number of frames depends on the aspect ratio
(
=
52) setting.
- [
] or [ ]: 31 frames
- [
]: 25 frames
- [
]: 21 frames
● If no faces are detected in Servo AF (
=
91) mode, the AF
frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the
shutter button halfway.
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
2
Resize the AF frame.
z To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
[ ] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
original size.
3
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button.
● AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (
=
41) or digital tele-converter (
=
89), and in manual
focus mode (
=
86).
● You can also access the screen in step 1 by pressing the [ ]
button.
● You can also return the AF frame to the original position in the
center by holding down the [
] button.
● You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (
=
80).
● You can also congure the AF frame size by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ 3] tab
(
=
31).
● On the screen in step 2, you can also move the AF frame by
touching the screen, restore the AF frame to the original position
by touching [
], or exit the setting by touching [ ].
91
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and
then choose [Off] (
=
31).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button and turn the [ ]
dial to choose [SERVO].
2
Focus.
z The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF method.
● Continuous shooting (
=
47) is slower in Servo AF mode.
● If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and
aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
● AF lock shooting is not available.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
2] tab (
=
31) is not available.
● Not available when using the self-timer (
=
45).
● To have the camera keep adjusting the focus during continuous
shooting (
=
47), specify Servo AF with [AF method] set to
[1-point AF].
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
31)
► [
3] tab ► [AF operation].
92
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered
person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other
registered people have been detected. However, their names will
be recorded in the still images (
=
48).
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
89).
2
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
z Touch the subject or person on the screen.
z When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [
] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
z To cancel Touch AF, touch [
].
3
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specic person’s face to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
89).
2
Enter Face Select mode.
z Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
z After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [
] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
z Even if the subject moves, the face frame
[
] follows the subject within a certain
range.
z If a face is not detected, [
] is not
displayed.
3
Choose the face to focus on.
z To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button.
z Once you cycle through all detected
faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed,
followed by the selected AF method
screen.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
93
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Flash Range” (
=
213).
1
Raise the ash.
z Move the [ ] switch.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose a ash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Move the [
] switch to raise the ash,
then congure the setting.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
● If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,
make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the
[
] button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [Off] (
=
31).
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
● Even if you are shooting in [ ] mode (
=
86), the camera will
revert to [
] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to focus.
● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered
people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still
images (
=
48). However, a name will display if the subject
chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face ID.
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
z With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
z The focus is now locked, and [
] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
z To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [
]
button again.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (
=
46).
● When [AF method] is set to [1-point AF], you can lock the focus
during movie recording by touching the screen. To unlock the
focus, touch [
].
94
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (
=
79), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
z Raise the ash, press the [
] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
z The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for ash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (
=
31) and
choosing [
5] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
● You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (
=
31) and choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash
Control] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
● You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] screen (
=
31)
as follows (except when an optional external ash is mounted).
- Press and hold the [
] button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
● You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] screen (
=
31)
by pressing the [
] button and touching [ ].
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
56).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button
halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● Adjustment is also possible by pressing the [ ] button, touching
the desired option, and then touching it again.
95
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Flash Timing
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (
=
31).
1st-curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd-curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter closes.
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
79), you can lock the exposure for ash
shots.
1
Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
93).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
z The ash res, and when
[
] is displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
z To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
z After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● FE: Flash Exposure
96
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Capturing in RAW Format
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
JPEG Images
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality
and compressed to reduce le size. However, the
compression process is irreversible, and images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed
state. Image processing may also cause some loss of
image quality.
RAW Images
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially
no loss of image quality from the camera’s image
processing. The data cannot be used in this state for
viewing on a computer or printing. You must rst use
the software (Digital Photo Professional,
=
178) to
convert images to ordinary JPEG or TIFF les. Images
can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.
z Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
z To capture in RAW format only, choose
the [
] option.
z To capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
[
] button. A [ ] mark is displayed
next to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow
the same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
● When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (
=
178).
● Digital zoom (
=
41) is not available when capturing images
in RAW format. Additionally, noise reduction level (
=
81),
dynamic range correction (
=
82), shadow correction (
=
83),
and My Colors (
=
85) cannot be congured.
Other Settings
Changing Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 8 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
(
=
96). For guidelines on how many of each kind of image can t on a
memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
212).
z Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Quality” (
=
53) to adjust the settings.
● [ ] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [
] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more t on a memory card.
97
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● For details on the relationship between the number of recording
pixels and the number of shots that will t on a card, see “Number
of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
212).
● The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Using the Menu
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z To capture in RAW format at the same
time, turn the [
] dial and choose
[ ] under [RAW]. Note that only JPEG
images are captured when [−] is selected.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [JPEG], and then choose the
image size and quality. Note that only RAW
images are captured when [−] is selected.
z When nished, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen.
● [RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.
z Follow the steps in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
56) to choose [Shoot
Only].
98
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (
=
214).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (
=
80)
30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]
● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
56).
● The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the
ash res.
● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (
=
99).
● [ ]: Time value
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
customize the camera for your shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
99
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter
Speed” (
=
214) and “Aperture” (
=
214).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed (1).
z Turn the [
] dial to set the aperture value
(2).
z Press the [
] button, choose ISO speed
adjustment (3), and turn the [ ] dial to
specify a value.
z When the ISO speed is xed, an
exposure level mark (5) based on
your specied value is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (4). The
exposure level mark is shown as [
] or
[ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
z The ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press
the shutter button halfway after setting
the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with your
specied shutter speed and aperture
value, the ISO speed is displayed in
orange.
(
1
) (
2
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
3
)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (
=
214).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
value.
● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
● In [
] and [ ] modes, press the [ ] button and set
[Safety Shift] on the [
6] tab to [On] (
=
31) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However, safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
100
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
1
Specify bulb exposure.
z Set the shutter speed to [BULB], following
steps 1 – 3 in “Specic Shutter Speeds
and Aperture Values ([ ] Mode)”
(
=
99).
2
Shoot.
z Shots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
stabilization (
=
56).
● To avoid camera shake that may otherwise occur when pressing
the shutter button directly, you can shoot remotely (
=
156) or
use an optional remote switch (
=
172).
● When [Touch Shutter] is set to [On], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again. Be
careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (
=
80)
[BULB], 30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]
● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
● Screen brightness may change depending on your specied
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [
].
● [ ]: Manual
● Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specied
metering method (
=
79).
● The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
- Adjust exposure by turning the exposure compensation dial.
- Press the [
] button to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness
changes accordingly.
101
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
see “Shutter Speeds” (
=
214), “Aperture” (
=
214), and “Changing the
ISO Speed” (
=
80).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
2
Congure the settings.
z Press the [ ] button to choose whether
to congure shutter speed or ISO speed,
and then turn the [ ] dial to set the
value.
z Turn the [
] dial to set the aperture
value.
3
Shoot.
z Press the movie button.
z During recording, you can switch the
setting to congure by pressing the [
]
button repeatedly and adjust the value by
turning the [ ] ring.
● Some shutter speeds may cause ickering on the screen when
recording under uorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ][ ][ ] modes.
1
Specify the ash mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Flash Mode], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Manual], and then press the [
] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the ash level, and then press the [ ]
button.
z Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:
Maximum
● You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (
=
31)
and choosing [
5] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Output].
● You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (
=
31) as follows.
- Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
● You can also access the [Flash Control] MENU screen (
=
31)
by raising the ash, pressing the [
] button, and touching [ ].
102
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Customizing Controls and Display
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button
on the shooting screen. You can also customize what information is
displayed.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Choose [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
information display] ► [Display
switching], and then press the [ ] button
(
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose any screen you prefer not
to display, and then press the [ ] button
to remove the [ ] mark. Pressing the
[ ] button again will add the [ ] mark,
which indicates that it is selected for
display.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
● At least one option must be selected.
● In [AUTO] mode, you can also adjust the exposure before
recording by turning the exposure compensation dial.
● When the ISO speed is xed, an exposure level mark based on
your specied value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [
] or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
● You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the
shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained
with your specied shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
● By touching [ ][ ], you can also adjust setting items selected by
touch on the bottom of the screen.
● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [
] and
turning the [
] ring while [ ] is displayed.
103
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Assigning Functions to Controls
Still Images
Movies
Reassign functions of the [ ] ring, [ ] dial, or [ ] dial, or assign
common functions to the [ ] button, [ ] button, movie button, or [ ]
button.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Function Assignment] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ][ ] dials to choose the dial or
button to assign, and then press the [ ]
button.
z When assigning the [
] ring, [ ] dial,
or [ ] dial, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose the shooting
mode or the camera control, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose the shooting
mode or function, and then press the
[ ] button.
z When assigning the [
], [ ], [ ],
or [ ] button, press the [ ] button,
choose the function on the screen
displayed (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ][ ] dials), and
then press the [ ] button.
Customizing the Information Displayed
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing
Display Information” (
=
102) to choose
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [ ]
mark.
z To see an example of display, press the
[
] button to return to the [Display
switching] screen.
● For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
information display] ► [Grid display].
● In Movie mode, you can also choose [2.35:1], [1.85:1], [1.75:1],
[1.66:1], and [4:3] grid options. However, these options are not
available when movie quality is [
].
104
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images
Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ] or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you
switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings)
can be retained this way.
Settings that can be saved
● Shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ])
● Items set in [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes (
=
79 –
=
99)
● Shooting menu settings
● Zoom positions
● Manual focus positions (
=
86)
● My Menu settings (
=
105)
1
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Save the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the destination, and then
press the [ ] button.
[ ] ring, [ ] dial, or
[ ] dial
By assigning [ / ], in [ ] mode you can
set the shutter speed with the [ ] dial and
the aperture value with the [ ] dial.
[
] button
Press the button to activate the assigned
function.
[
] button
Movie button
[
] button
● To restore default functions to the [ ] button, [ ] button, movie
button, and [
] button, choose [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
● Icons labeled with [
] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
● With [
], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the
assigned button in [1-point AF] mode (
=
89,
=
89).
● With [
] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records
white balance data (
=
84), and the white balance setting
changes to [
] or [ ].
● With [
], each press of the button that it is assigned to adjusts
and locks the focus, and [
] is displayed on the screen.
● With [
], pressing the button that it is assigned to deactivates
screen display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Press any button other than the power button.
- Hold the camera in another orientation.
- Raise or lower the ash.
- Either open the screen and rotate it toward the front, or close
the screen if it is already open and facing the front.
● You can still record movies in [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
● You can also congure settings by touching a desired option and
then touching it again or touching [
].
105
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
3
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Sort], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
] button.
● Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
● To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
[
] button in Shooting mode, set [Set default view] to [Yes].
● On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can
also touch items to select them.
● On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the
display order.
● To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ]
or [
], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.
● To clear information you have saved to [ ] or [ ] and restore
default values, turn the mode dial to [
] or [ ] and choose
[Reset All] (
=
165).
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access to these items quickly
from a single screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select items], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
z [
] is displayed.
z To cancel saving, press the [
] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [
] button.
106
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
z Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
z To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ ]
button to enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
107
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
z To view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
z To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
z You can also choose images in Scroll
Display mode by dragging left or right.
z Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, drag up or
down.
z To start movie playback, touch [
] in
step 2 of “Viewing” (
=
106).
z To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
z To stop playback, touch the screen. The
screen shown at left is displayed, and the
following operations are available.
z Touch [
] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
z To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
z To resume playback, touch [
].
z Touch [
] to return to the screen in
step 2 of “Viewing” (
=
106).
z Movies are identied by a [ ] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
z Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
z To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
z To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
z After the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5]
tab ► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Resume] ►
[Last shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
31) and choose your desired effect on the [ 5] tab ►
[Transition Effect].
(
1
)
108
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
108).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
z The graph in detailed information display
(
=
108) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
z The histogram can also be accessed
while shooting (
=
102,
=
193).
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
z The RGB histogram shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or
to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see
“Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (
=
194).
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
RGB Histogram, GPS Information
Display
● Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
109
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
2
Play the digest movie.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
z The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
=
108).
● You can also play digest movies by touching [ ] on the
screen in step 1 and touching [
Play ] on the screen in
step 2.
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1
Choose a movie.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose a date (
=
31).
2
Play the movie.
z Press the [ ] button to start playback.
z Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(
=
155). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
z Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
● You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images
only) and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of
the screen upward or downward in detailed information display.
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (
=
37) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
z Choose a still image labeled with
[ ] and press the [ ] button.
110
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
z Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
z To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
z Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Index Effect] ► [Off].
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (
=
108),
the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (
=
48)
will be displayed.
z Press the [
] button several times
until simple information display is
activated, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
image.
z Names will be displayed on detected
people.
● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 3] tab ► [Face ID Info]
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
111
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
1
Choose the rst condition.
z In single-image display, press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a display lter.
z When [
] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [ ]
button and go to step 3.
2
Choose the second condition and
view the ltered images.
z When you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the rst condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
z To switch to ltered image display, press
the [
] button and go to step 3.
z When you have selected [
] as the rst
condition, press the [ ] button, and
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the
next screen to choose a person.
3
View the ltered images.
z Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
z To cancel ltered display, press the [
]
button.
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
Touch-Screen Operations
z Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
z To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
z Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
z To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your ngers apart.
z Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(
=
116) or delete (
=
118) these images all at once.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
121).
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [ ]
mode (
=
37).
Name
Displays images of a registered person (
=
48).
112
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Still Images
Movies
Use the front dial to nd and jump between desired images quickly by
ltering image display according to your specied conditions.
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites
(
=
121).
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the rst image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1
Choose a condition.
z Choose a condition (or jump method)
in single-image display by turning the
[ ] dial and then pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2
View images matching your
specied condition, or jump by the
specied amount.
z Turn the [ ] dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or
back.
Touch-Screen Operations
z You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Front Dial
to Jump between Images” (
=
112) by
dragging left or right with two ngers.
● To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in
step 3.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
110), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
115), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
115). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (
=
116) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
119), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
183), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
185).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
124 –
=
129), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
● You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps
1 and 2.
● After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
113
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
● During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
110) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (
=
115). By choosing [Protect
All Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (
=
116), [All Images
in Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (
=
119), or
[Select All in Group] in “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)”
(
=
183) or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
185), all images
in the group can be manipulated at once.
● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single
still images, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Group
Images] ► [Off] (
=
31). However, grouped images cannot be
ungrouped during individual playback.
● In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying
a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)” (
=
59) is
only shown immediately after you shoot.
● You can also view group images individually by touching [ ]
on the screen in steps 1 and 2.
● Turning the [ ] dial when browsing images in index display
will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump
method chosen in single-image display. However, if you have
chosen [
] or [ ], the jump method will be switched to [ ].
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Images shot continuously (
=
47,
=
60), images shot in [ ] mode
(
=
59), and individual still images saved as source data in [ ] mode
(
=
71) are grouped, and only the rst image is displayed. However,
you can also view the images individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[ ].
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
3
View images in the group
individually.
z Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the
group.
z To cancel group playback, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (
=
30).
114
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
z Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (
=
51) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
● You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
] to display the
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
● You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Erasing Names
z On the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (
=
114), choose
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● You can also erase names by touching [OK] after [Erase?] is
displayed.
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ 3] tab (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (
=
110),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose the editing option.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
115
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
z Spread your ngers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
z You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
z To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
z Pinch in to zoom out.
z Touch [
] to restore single-image
display.
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1] tab
(
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
z Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
27) are deactivated
during slideshows.
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
z Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
z The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
z To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
z To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [
] dial.
● You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
● You can check the focus when [
] is displayed by pressing
the [
] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).
When multiple positions are in focus, press the [
] button
repeatedly to switch to other positions.
(
1
)
116
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (
=
118).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial). [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel protection, choose [OFF]. [
]
is no longer displayed.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
160).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ 1] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose an option as desired (
=
31).
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [
][ ] buttons down.
● You can congure slideshow repetition, display time per image,
and the transition between images on the screen accessed by
choosing [Set up] and pressing the [
] button (
=
31).
● You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
117
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
116), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
116), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
● You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching
[
].
● You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
118
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
116) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, pressing the
[
] button while the image is displayed gives you the option of
choosing [Erase
], [Erase ], or [Erase ].
● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
123).
4
Protect the images.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can also choose the rst or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4.
● You can also display the screen for choosing the rst or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
● You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
116), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
119
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
119), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
117), [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
116) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ 1] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
120
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
2
Rotate the image.
z Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
=
121).
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ 1] tab (
=
31).
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
119), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
117) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
119), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
121
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
● “Viewing” (
=
106), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
115), “Protecting
Images” (
=
116), “Erasing Images” (
=
118), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
183), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
185)
z Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
z To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [OFF], and then press the
[
] button.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Favorites].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ 1] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
z To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
2
Rotate the image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
z The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [
] button.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate
images or touch [
] to return to the menu screen.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
31).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
120) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
122
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Convenient Control: Assigned Buttons
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the [ ]
button.
1
Choose [Set Shortcut button].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Set Shortcut button] on the
[ 6] tab (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a function to assign, and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Use the assigned function as
needed.
z Press the [ ] button to activate the
assigned function.
● To restore default settings, choose [ ].
● Pressing the [
] button with [ ] assigned when the camera is
not connected to a printer adds the image to the print list. When
the camera is connected to a printer, pressing the button starts
printing.
3
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
● Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (
=
130).
● Favorite images will have a three-star rating (
)
when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7.
(Does not apply to movies or RAW images.)
● You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
● Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(
=
123).
123
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
2
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a function to assign.
Assignable Functions
Favorites Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Next Favorite
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as
a favorite.
Previous Favorite
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged
as a favorite.
Next Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the next
shooting date.
Previous Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the
previous shooting date.
To Camera
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions”
(
=
133).
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
To Web Service
Slideshow Start a slideshow.
Erase Erase an image.
Protect Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate Rotate an image.
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Using Touch Actions Functions
z Drag across the screen as shown.
z The function assigned to [
] is now
activated.
z Similarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [
], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
z Customize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [ 6]
tab (
=
31).
124
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
3
Review the new image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
].
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
● You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen
in step 3.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Resize].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ 3] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
124 –
=
127) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
● To access the screen for each kind of editing, choose the editing
function with [
], touch an image, and then touch [ ].
● When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Choose an image size.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an image size
(
=
30).
z Press the [
] button.
2
Save the new image.
z After [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The image is now saved as a new le.
125
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
3
Preview the cropped image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
z To switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
[
] button repeatedly.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
124).
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
] or resized to [ ] (
=
124).
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
● Cropped images cannot be resized.
● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
● While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
● Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [
]
button, choosing [
3] tab ► [Cropping], pressing the [ ]
button, choosing an image, and pressing the [
] button again.
● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (
=
48), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
● You can also move the cropping frame in step 2 by dragging it.
You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (
=
115) on the
screen.
● Operations are also possible by touching [
], [ ], [ ], and
[
] on the top of the screen in step 2.
3
Choose an image size.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
124).
z Press the [
] button, and then follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
124).
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
30).
2
Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
z To move the frame, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons.
z To change the frame orientation, turn the
[ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
z To change the frame aspect ratio, turn
the [
] dial to choose [ ]. To switch
between aspect ratios ([ ], [ ],
[ ], and [ ]), press the [ ] button
repeatedly.
126
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (
=
85).
● You can also congure this setting by touching an option to select
it on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufcient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate le.
1
Choose [i-Contrast].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ 3] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
124).
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
separate le. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)” (
=
85).
1
Choose [My Colors].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [ 3] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
124).
● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
● Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
127
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
z The image is now saved as a new le.
z Press the [
] button, and then follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
124).
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
● Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
● You can save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite] on the
screen in step 4.
● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
● You can also congure this setting by touching [ ][ ] on the
screen in step 3.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the
[ 3] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
3
Correct the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
z Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
115).
128
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
3
Review the edited movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button. The
edited movie is now played.
z To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
z To cancel editing, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
4
Save the edited movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [
] button.
z The movie is now saved as a new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
168).
● You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies
(excluding digest movies,
=
37).
1
Choose [ ].
z Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
=
106), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
z The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
z (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
z To view the portions you can cut
(identied by [
] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
z If you move [
] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
(
1
)
(
2
)
129
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Editing Digest Movies
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (
=
37) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
z Play a movie recorded in [ ] mode
as described in “Viewing Short Movies
Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies)” (
=
109), and then
press the [ ] button to access the movie
control panel.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [
] button.
Image Quality of Compressed Movies
Before Compression After Compression
,
,
● [ ][ ] movies cannot be compressed.
● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
● Compressing movies to [
] or [ ] reduces the le
size while maintaining the same image quality.
130
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
1
Choose an image.
z Choose an image in single-image display.
z Themes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2
Access the home screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3
Preview an album.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
person or [Date] or [Event] as the album
theme, and then press the [ ] button.
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
4
Save the album.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save Album as Movie], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the album (
=
106).
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose themes for
the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the camera
is more likely to add images tagged as favorites (
=
121) to albums.
Date
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as
the image displayed before you access the home screen.
Person’s
name
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject shot
during the same month as the image displayed before you
access the home screen.
Event
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event
before and after the image displayed before you access
the home screen.
Custom
Includes images based on your specied images, dates, or
people registered in Face ID.
131
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
z The screen at left is displayed when you
use a new or recently formatted memory
card. Choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), press
the [ ] button, and wait about a minute
and a half until the three types of music
are registered to the card.
z When using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
2
Create the album.
z Follow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
130) to create an
album.
3
Congure background music
settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the desired item, press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
option (
=
31).
4
Save the album.
z Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
130) to save albums.
● Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
● Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(
=
129).
● Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
- Still images
- Digest movies (
=
37)
- Short clips with a playback time of two seconds or more
(
=
76)
● Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
● You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [
] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [
][ ]
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [
] button.
● To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [
] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [
] button again.
Adding Background Music to Albums
Still Images
Movies
Choose from three kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
1
Register background music to a
memory card.
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
130), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ]
button.
132
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
4
Choose background music.
z When the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
music as described in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (
=
131),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose a color effect.
z On the screen in step 4 of “Viewing
Albums (Story Highlights)” (
=
130),
choose [Change Color Effect].
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a
color effect, and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Save the album.
z Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
130) to save albums.
● Up to 40 images can be selected if you choose [Image Selection].
The second time you create a custom album, [Select images
based on previous settings?] is displayed. To use previously
selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The previous images
are labeled with [
], and multiple images are displayed at once.
● Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
● The color effect may not be applied to some images.
● If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
● To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
● To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [
]
button.
Creating Your Own Albums
Still Images
Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1
Choose to create a Custom album.
z Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
130), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose album elements.
z Once you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
z Press the [
] button after you
are nished selecting still images,
digest movies, or short clips in [Image
Selection], dates in [Date Selection], or
people in [Person Selection].
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
133
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
134
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the
process of installing Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation once the devices are connected via NFC varies depending on
the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
and geotag your shots (“Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images
and Control the Camera” (
=
155)). It’s easy to reconnect to recent
devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection. The connection is ended automatically
after image transfer.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
z Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices N-Mark ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
● Connect via NFC (
=
134)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
● Connect to a device assigned to the [
] button (
=
136)
Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplies
sending images to a smartphone (
=
136). Note that only one
smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.
● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (
=
138)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera users who connect their camera
to a smartphone via Wi-Fi should consider switching from the
CameraWindow mobile app to the Camera Connect mobile app.
135
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
4
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
157).
2
Establish the connection.
z Make sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
z Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
z The camera starts up automatically.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
z The devices are connected automatically.
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
z After this screen is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
z You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
136
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
● If during connection a message on the camera requests you to
enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Sending Images to an NFC-
Compatible Smartphone” (
=
134) to enter it.
● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (
=
151).
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the
Button
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]
button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for
viewing and saving camera images on your connected device.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
139).
1
Install Camera Connect.
z For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
z For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2
Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
134).
● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
151).
● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 4] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [NFC] ► [Off].
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Touch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (
=
134) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
z The images are now sent. The
connection is ended automatically after
the image is sent.
137
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
6
Choose the smartphone to connect to.
z Choose the smartphone (either by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or by turning
the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
z After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will close in about one minute.)
7
Import images.
z Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
z Use the smartphone to end the
connection; the camera will automatically
turn off.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
136).
● For better security, you can display a password on the screen
in step 3 by accessing MENU (
=
31) and choosing [ 4] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the
password eld on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
● One smartphone can be registered to the [
] button. To assign
a different one, rst clear the current one in MENU (
=
31) ►
[
4] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button].
● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
4
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
z In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5
Start Camera Connect.
z Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
z After the camera recognizes the
smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed.
138
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
z Choose the smartphone to connect to,
as described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending
to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
136).
5
Adjust the privacy setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
z You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
6
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
z To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
139).
1
Install Camera Connect.
z For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
z For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK] (
=
136).
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
139
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or
through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
z Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by either following steps 1 – 3 in “Sending
to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
136) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
138).
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
z A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
z For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access
Points” (
=
142).
z For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (
=
144) to connect to the
access point and choose the smartphone.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
157).
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
151).
140
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1
Download the software.
z With a computer connected to the
Internet, access http://www.canon.com/
icpd/.
z Access the site for your country or region.
z Download the software.
5
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
z Follow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
138) to congure the privacy
settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
“Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (
=
136) or step 4 in
“Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
138).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from
step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
139).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
139) from step 4.
141
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Congure the setting.
z Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
z In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
● The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
2
Begin the installation.
z Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
z Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
z Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
● To uninstall the software, follow these steps.
- Windows: Select [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon
Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation.
- Mac OS: In the [Canon Utilities] folder within the [Applications]
folder, drag the folder of the software for uninstallation to the
Trash, and then empty the Trash.
142
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
● If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
31)
► [
4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Wi-Fi” (
=
211).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
=
142) or not (
=
144). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
143
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Choose the target device.
z Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
z When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
z Double-click the connected camera icon.
z Driver installation will begin.
z After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
10
Display CameraWindow.
z Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [WPS Connection].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose [PBC Method].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
7
Establish the connection.
z On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
z On the camera, press the [
] button to
go to the next step.
z The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
144
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
z View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
142).
2
Choose an access point.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Enter the access point password.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(
=
32).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
z To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
142).
11
Import images.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
z Use Digital Photo Professional to view
images you save to a computer. To view
movies, use preinstalled or commonly
available software compatible with
movies recorded by the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step
2 (
=
142).
● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
145
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are
detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the
list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point
settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an
SSID, security settings, and a password.
● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [
*
] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [
] button.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
142).
● To connect to a device via an access point, conrm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
142).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
142)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
144) from step 2.
146
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
4
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [Authenticate].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Authenticate], and then
press the [ ] button.
6
Establish a connection with an
access point.
z Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
142) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
144).
z Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
z Keep this screen displayed until you are
nished with step 7.
7
Enter the authentication code.
z On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
z A six-digit conrmation number is
displayed.
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
z From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
z Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
2
Choose the type of camera.
z On this camera model, [ ] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
z Once you choose [
], a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 7, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 6.
3
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
147
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camera rst (
=
146).
1
Access the Web service settings
screen.
z Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY” (
=
146) to log in
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
z Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
3
Choose [ ].
z In Playback mode, press the [ ] button
to access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The Web service settings are now
updated.
● If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
8
Check the conrmation number and
complete the setup process.
z Check the conrmation number on the
second screen in step 6 (displayed after
you pressed the [ ][ ] buttons or turned
the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
pressed the [ ] button).
z Make sure the conrmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
z [
] (
=
153) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations, and the [ ] icon changes
to [ ].
z A message is displayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is nished. You can add
other Web services, as needed. In this
case, follow the instructions from step
2 in “Registering Other Web Services”
(
=
147).
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 3 (
=
146).
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
congure the setting.
148
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (
=
151).
● To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
2
Choose the destination.
z Choose the icon of the Web service
to connect to (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
z If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [
] button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z After the image is sent, [OK] is displayed.
Press the [
] button to return to the
playback screen.
149
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
5
Choose the printer.
z Choose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose an image to print.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
z Press the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
z For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (
=
180).
z To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
139).
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
139).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
138).
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
4
Connect the printer to the network.
z In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose
the SSID (network name) displayed on the
camera to establish a connection.
150
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
4
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
153).
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera
that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports Eye-Fi cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
138).
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
z Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
151
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [
] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
151), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1
Choose [Select and send].
z On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
151), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
152
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
● In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
Notes on Sending Images
● Keep your ngers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area
(
=
4). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image
transfers.
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
● For movies that you do not compress (
=
129), a separate,
compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
117) to specify images.
z To include movies, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Sending Favorite Images
Send only images tagged as favorites (
=
121).
1
Choose [Favorite Images].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
151), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
z An image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
[
] button to remove [ ].
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
153
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,
so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
z Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
146).
z To include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
145), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [
] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
● Image size can also be congured in MENU (
=
31) ► [ 4] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to
e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
z On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
32).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
154
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
z If you have already assigned [ ] to the
[ ] button, press the [ ] button.
z If you have not assigned the button this
way, choose [
] as described in steps
1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web
Services” (
=
148).
z Sent images are labeled with a [
] icon.
2
Save the images to the computer.
z Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
z Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
168).
● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
3
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only
when sending images by pressing
the [ ] button).
z Clear the [ ] button setting if a
smartphone is already assigned to the
button (
=
136).
z Press the [
] button to access the mobile
connection screen, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install the software.
z Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (
=
140).
2
Register the camera.
z Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
z Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
], and
then click [Add new camera].
z A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
z Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [
].
155
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images on the camera (
=
155)
● Shoot remotely (
=
156)
● Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (
=
136,
=
138,
=
157).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
21). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (
=
162)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
● Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (
=
154).
● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (
=
145), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
● Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
● Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
● For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
156
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
● [ ] mode is used for shooting in modes other than [ ], [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], and [ ]. However, some Quick Set and
MENU settings you have congured in advance may be changed
automatically.
● Movie shooting is not available.
● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Turn the mode dial to choose [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] as the mode.
2
Secure the camera.
z Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
3
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
136, =
138).
z In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
4
Choose remote shooting.
z In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
z The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
objects will obstruct it.
z Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
z At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
5
Shoot.
z Use the smartphone to shoot.
157
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(
=
157)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (
=
136)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (
=
157)
O O O O
–
O
: Congurable
–
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
157), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
z Select the input eld and press the [
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (
=
32).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
157), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The connection information will be
erased.
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose the item to edit.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
z The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
158
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [
4] tab (
=
165).
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose [Change Device Nickname].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Change Device
Nickname], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Change the nickname.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (
=
32), and then enter a
nickname.
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you rst use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [
] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
159
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (
=
31) settings on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3], and [ 4] tabs can be
congured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
z Choose [Create Folder] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
z Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
z Choose [File Numbering] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
160
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
160), press the
[ ] button to choose [Low Level
Format]. A [ ] icon is displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
160) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
160), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
Changing the Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
z Choose [Video system] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose an option.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted,
=
160) memory card.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
z Choose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [OK].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The memory card is now formatted.
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
161
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Still Images
Movies
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is
useful in modes such as [ ] (
=
70).
z Choose [Night Display] on the [
2] tab,
and then choose [On] (
=
31).
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On].
z [
] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
193).
z The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
z To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (
=
102) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1
Make sure the camera is level.
z Place the camera on a at surface, such
as a table.
2
Calibrate the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Calibrate] and press the
[
] button. A conrmation message is
displayed.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic Level] on the [
1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Reset], and then press the [
]
button.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
162
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
21).
1
Specify your destination.
z Choose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
z To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [
] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
z Press the [
] button.
2
Switch to the destination time zone.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z [
] is now shown on the shooting screen
(
=
193).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
21) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (
=
27).
z Choose [Power Saving] on the [
2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, press the [
] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to congure the setting.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
161) to [On].
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
z Choose [
2] tab ► [LCD Brightness],
press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in
single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting
on the [
2] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and hold the
[
] button again for at least one second or restart the camera.
163
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
z Choose [Mute] on the [
3] tab, and then
choose [On].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ]
button as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
106) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [
][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down quickly.
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
z Choose [Volume] on the [
3] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
z Choose [Date/Time] on the [
2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
26). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
z Choose [Lens Retraction] on the [
2] tab,
and then choose [0 sec.].
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
z Choose [Language
] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
164
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased to respond to a
lighter touch, or you can disable touch control.
z Choose [
4] tab ► [Touch Operation],
and then choose the desired option.
z To increase touch-screen panel
sensitivity, choose [Sensitive], and to
disable touch control, choose [Disable].
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (
=
35), the
MF indicator (
=
86), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
z Choose [Units] on the [
4] tab, and then
choose [ft/in].
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
z Choose [Certication Logo Display] on
the [
4] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
z Choose [Sound Options] on the [
3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to change the sound.
● The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode
(
=
37) cannot be changed.
Start-Up Screen
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
z Choose [Start-up Image] on the [
1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu
(
=
30) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
z Choose [Hints & Tips] on the [
3] tab,
and then choose [Off].
165
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted.
● [
4] tab setting [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
133)
● [
4] tab setting [Mobile Device Connect Button] (
=
136)
Restoring Default Camera Settings
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera settings.
1
Access the [Reset All] screen.
z Choose [Reset All] on the [ 4] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Restore default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Default settings are now restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- Information registered using Face ID (
=
48)
- [
1] tab setting [Video system] (
=
160)
- [
2] tab settings [Time Zone] (
=
162), [Date/Time] (
=
163),
and [
3] tab setting [Language ] (
=
163)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (
=
84)
- Shooting mode chosen in [
] (
=
61) and [ ] (
=
62)
modes
- Exposure compensation (
=
79) setting
- Movie mode (
=
74)
- Wi-Fi settings (
=
133)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (
=
161)
- Copyright information (
=
165)
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
z Choose [Copyright Info] on the [
4] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]
button to access the keyboard, and enter
the name (
=
32).
z Press the [
] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
● To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [
] button.
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
z Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(
=
165) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
166
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
167
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
System Map
Neck Strap
Battery Pack
NB-10L*
1
(with terminal cover)
Battery Charger
CB-2LC/CB-2LCE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader Computer
TV/Video
System
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC80
Included Accessories
Power
Cables
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Flash Units
Lens Accessories
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
Speedlite*
3
600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II,
430EX II, 320EX, 270EX II
Canon-Brand Lens Filter
(67 mm dia.)*
4
Lens Hood LH-DC100/
Filter Adapter FA-DC67B
Remote Switch
RS-60E3
Electronic Viewnder
EVF-DC1
Other Accessories
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3 The following accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX, 430EX,
270EX, and 220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, ST-E3-RT, Speedlite Bracket
SB-E2, and Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
*4 Requires Filter Adapter FA-DC67B.
168
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Flash Units
Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/
580EX II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II
z Shoe-mounted ash unit that enables
many styles of ash photography.
Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and
220EX are also supported.
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
z Prevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, ST-E3-RT
z Enables wireless control of slave
Speedlite ash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
z For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
HDMI Cable HTC-100
z For connecting the camera to an HDMI
input of a high-denition TV.
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-10L
z Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
z Charger for Battery Pack NB-10L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
z For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
169
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen
of the TV. Movies shot at an image quality of [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] can be viewed in
high denition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
z On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Remote Switch RS-60E3
z Enables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Lens Hood LH-DC100/Filter Adapter
FA-DC67B
z Prevents extraneous light outside the
angle of view from entering the lens and
causing ares or ghosting, which reduce
image quality.
z Adapter required when mounting a
67 mm lter.
Canon Lens Filter (67 mm dia.)
z Protects the lens and enables a variety of
shooting effects.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
z Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
170
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Still Images
Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Open the cover.
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
20)
to open the memory card/battery cover,
and then open the coupler cable port
cover as shown.
3
Connect the adapter to the coupler.
z Insert the adapter plug fully into the
coupler.
4
Insert the coupler.
z Insert the coupler as shown until it locks
into place.
(
1
)
(
2
)
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
z Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
z When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
194).
● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, AF-Point Zoom (
=
55), MF-Point Zoom (
=
86),
MF Peaking (
=
88) and Night Display (
=
161) are not
available.
171
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
Attaching a lens lter to the camera protects the lens and allows you
to shoot with various effects. To attach a lens lter, you will need Filter
Adapter FA-DC67B, which is included with Lens Hood LH-DC100 (sold
separately).
1
Attach the lter adapter.
z Make sure the camera is off.
z Align the notches on the camera and the
lter adapter and turn the adapter in the
direction of the arrow until locked.
z To remove the lter adapter, turn it in the
opposite direction.
2
Attach a lter.
z Turn the lter in the direction of the arrow
to attach it to the camera.
z Make sure not to attach the lter too
tightly. Doing so could prevent removal of
the lter and damage the camera.
● We recommend the use of genuine Canon lters (67 mm dia.).
● When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option
[Safety MF] to [On].
● If you use the built-in ash with the lter adapter attached,
portions of the image may appear darker.
● When using the lter adapter, be sure to use only one lter at a
time. Attaching multiple lters, or accessories such as a heavy
lens, may cause the attachments to fall off and become damaged.
● Do not grip the lter adapter tightly.
● Remove the lter adapter when not using a lter or a hood.
5
Close the cover.
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
6
Connect the power cord.
z Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
z Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
z When nished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
(
2
)
(
1
)
172
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
● Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in ash when the lens
hood is attached.
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1
Connect the remote switch.
z Make sure the camera is off.
z Open the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
2
Shoot.
z To shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
For wide-angle shots of backlit subjects without using the ash, attach
optional Lens Hood LH-DC100/Filter Adapter FA-DC67B to prevent light
outside the angle of view from entering the lens. To attach a hood, you will
need Filter Adapter FA-DC67B, which is included with the lens hood.
z Make sure the camera is off.
z Attach the lter adapter as described
in step 1 of “Using Lens Filters (Sold
Separately)” (
=
171).
z Align the lens hood mark (2) with the lter
adapter mark (1), and turn the lens hood
in the direction of the arrow until it locks
in place.
z To remove the hood, hold down the hood
release button (3) and turn the hood in
the opposite direction.
z To attach the lens hood inverted (as
shown) when the hood is not used, align
the lens hood mark (2) with the lter
adapter mark (1), and turn the lens hood
in the direction of the arrow until it locks
in place.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
173
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using an Electronic Viewnder
(Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
Shooting is easier with an optional electronic viewnder, which helps you
concentrate on keeping subjects in focus.
Note that fewer shots and less recording time are available than when
using the screen (LCD monitor) on the back of the camera. For guidelines
on the number of shots and recording time available, see “Number of
Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
212).
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Attach the electronic viewnder to
the hot shoe.
z Remove the viewnder cover.
z Insert the viewnder’s connection
component into the hot shoe (
=
173) as
shown until it clicks into place.
3
Adjust the electronic viewnder to
the desired angle.
z You can adjust the angle of the viewnder
up to about 90° to suit the scene or how
you are shooting.
Using the Hot Shoe
Still Images
Movies
Use the hot shoe to attach an optional electronic viewnder or external
ash.
1
Remove the hot shoe cap.
z Pull off the cap as shown.
z To avoid losing the cap after removal,
store it in the viewnder or ash case.
2
Attaching the Hot Shoe Cap
z After removing a viewnder or ash,
reattach the hot shoe cap to protect the
hot shoe.
z Insert the cap as shown.
● Prevent the built-in ash from rising when you attach accessories
other than an electronic viewnder to the hot shoe. Otherwise,
the ash may strike the accessory. Note that the built-in ash will
not re.
● To avoid contact between the screen and any viewnder or ash
on the hot shoe, do not tilt the screen up when these accessories
are attached.
174
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
● Although the viewnder is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels may
be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not
indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
● Some aspect ratio settings (
=
52) will cause black bars to be
displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the
screen. These areas will not be recorded.
● You can switch between viewnder and screen display by
pressing the viewnder’s [
] button.
● If you have selected MENU (
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Display
Control] ► [Manual], the screen will not be activated when you
move your eye away from the viewnder. To activate the screen,
press the viewnder’s [
] button.
● Motion is displayed more smoothly (whether on the viewnder
or on the screen) in [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode
when a viewnder is used. If you prefer normal display and longer
battery life, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Display
Mode] ► [Power Saving].
● Display will switch to the camera screen during Wi-Fi
communication (
=
133) or when the on-screen keyboard
(
=
32) or Story Highlights home screen (
=
130) is displayed.
● You can congure display brightness (
=
162) for the viewnder
and camera screen separately.
4
Turn the camera on and switch
between using the screen and
viewnder as needed.
z Moving the viewnder near your eye will
activate its display and deactivate the
camera screen.
z Moving the viewnder away from your
eye will deactivate its display and activate
the camera screen.
5
Adjust the diopter.
z Turn the dial to bring viewnder images
into sharp focus.
6
When nished, remove the
electronic viewnder.
z To remove the viewnder from the
camera, turn the camera off and hold
down the viewnder’s [UNLOCK] button
as you remove it.
z Remove and store the viewnder when
you are not using it.
● The viewnder display and camera screen cannot be activated at
the same time.
● Touch operations on the camera screen are not possible while the
viewnder display is in use.
175
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
3
Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],
[ ], or [ ].
z Flash settings can only be congured in
these modes. In other modes, the ash
is adjusted and red automatically, as
needed.
4
Congure the external ash.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Options already set on the ash itself are
displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then set the
desired option.
z Available items vary depending on the
shooting mode and the ash attached
(
=
176).
● Settings for the built-in ash cannot be congured while a
Speedlite EX series ash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
● You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [
] button
for at least one second.
● 600EX-RT/580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the
external ash has been set up for stroboscopic ash.
● 320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie
recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [
] icon is shown.
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
More sophisticated ash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series ash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the
optional Speedlite 320EX ash is available.
● This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series
functions.
● Non-EX series Canon ash units may not re correctly or may not
re at all, in some cases.
● Use of non-Canon ash units (especially high-voltage ash units)
or ash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
● Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information.
Speedlite EX Series
Still Images
Movies
These optional ash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
ash photography needs.
1
Attach the ash.
z Make sure the camera is off, and then
attach the ash unit to the hot shoe.
2
Turn the ash on, and then turn the
camera on.
z A red [ ] icon is now displayed.
z The ash pilot lamp will light up when the
ash is ready.
176
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
*1 E-TTL mode is used for the ash.
*2 M mode is used for the ash.
In [
] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the ash. In this case,
when the ash res, ash exposure compensation set on the ash is applied to
the ash output level set on the camera.
*3 Can be congured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and ash exposure
compensation set on the ash is [+0]. When you adjust ash exposure
compensation on 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II Speedlites, the
camera display will be updated accordingly.
*4 Can be congured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the
ash unit.
*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX.
*6 Congure other options on the ash unit itself. Available with Speedlite
580EX II/600EX-RT/600EX/90EX. When this item is not set to [Off], [Shutter
Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-curtain], it
will be changed to [1st-curtain].)
*7 Can only be congured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Safety FE] and
[Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] on the [
4] tab on the camera (
=
165).
● In [ ] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping,
Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting
scenes determined by the camera are not displayed, and the
camera does not shoot continuously (
=
40).
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
z Using the optional Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
can help prevent unnatural shadows next
to subjects during vertical shooting.
z To keep the LCD screen out of the way
of the bracket, use the screen closed and
facing outward.
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
The following items are available in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode. In
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Corr.] can be congured. (With
autoash control, the ash always res.) However, external ash units do
not re in modes that the built-in ash does not re (
=
195).
Item Options
Shooting Mode
Flash Mode
Auto*
1
O O O
O
Manual*
2
O O O O
Flash Exp.
Comp*
3
–3 to +3
O O O O
Flash Output*
4
1/128*
5
to 1/1 (in 1/3-stop
increments)
O O O O
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/
Hi-speed
O O O O
Wireless Func.*
6
Off/Optical/Radio
O O O O
Red-Eye Lamp On/Off
O O O O
Safety FE*
7
On
O O O
–
Off
O O O O
Clear Flash Settings*
8
O O O O
177
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using Headphones (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
Headphones can be used to listen to audio as the camera captures it
when you shoot, or when you play back movies.
1
Connect the headphones.
z Open the cover and connect the
headphones.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[ 3] tab ► [Headphones], press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to set the volume to [0].
z Put the headphones on and press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
● Audio will no longer be recorded in movies you are recording if
you accidentally connect headphones to the external microphone
IN terminal during recording.
● In shooting modes other than Movie mode, audio is only sent to
headphones during movie recording and when you are adjusting
the volume for [Headphones] (
=
177) or [Level] (
=
76).
● No audio is sent to headphones during remote shooting (
=
156)
or during other Wi-Fi connections.
● Audio is not sent to headphones connected to the external
microphone IN terminal. Connect headphones to the headphone jack.
Using an External Microphone
An external microphone with a mini plug (3.5 mm diameter) can be
connected to the external microphone IN terminal (
=
4) for use in
recording. Note that the built-in microphone is not used for recording when
an external microphone is connected.
Open the cover and connect the
external microphone.
● Any attenuator settings you have congured are also applied to
recording with the external microphone (
=
76).
● Connecting an external microphone will deactivate [Wind Filter]
(
=
76).
178
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software” (
=
140).
Saving Images to a Computer
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Mini-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
z Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
2
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
z Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
z In the screen that is displayed, click the
change program link of [
].
(
1
)
(
2
)
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
● CameraWindow
- Import images to your computer
● Image Transfer Utility
- Set up Image Sync (
=
153) and receive images
● Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
● Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
● To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
● Mac OS X 10.8
When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system
requirements in “Checking Your Computer Environment” (
=
140).
179
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
z Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
z Double-click [
].
3
Save the images to the computer.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
z To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
180
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
4
Turn the camera on.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
5
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
6
Access the printing screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
7
Print the image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Printing now begins.
z To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is nished.
z When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (
=
169).
● RAW images cannot be printed.
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Mini-B).
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
z Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
3
Turn the printer on.
181
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
181) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
z A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom lever
or turn the [ ] dial.
z To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To rotate the frame, press the [
]
button.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Print the image.
z Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (
=
180)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
180) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose an option (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button to return to the
printing screen.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print (
=
181).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
(
=
182).
182
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L
and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
=
182), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side
length.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose the length (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the printing area.
z Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
181) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
181) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
z When choosing [N-up], press the [
]
button. On the next screen, choose the
number of images per sheet (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Print the image.
183
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
185) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
● RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print Settings], and then
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose and congure items as needed
(
=
31).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are printed
per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
–
Clear DPOF
data
On
All image print list settings are cleared after printing.
Off
–
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
180) to choose a movie. This screen
is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. On the
next screen, choose an option (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
3
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, le
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand
PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier
models.
184
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
3
Specify the number of prints.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
z To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
z Printing quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
z When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
184), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
117) to specify images.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
184), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
2] tab (
=
21).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z You can now specify the number of copies.
z If you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press the [ ]
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
185
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Choosing a Selection Method
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
185), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z [
] is displayed.
z To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other images.
z When nished, press the [ ] button
to return to the menu screen.
Clearing All Images from the Print List
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
184), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
z When images have been added to the
print list (
=
183 –
=
184), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
z Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
186
Appendix
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
185), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
185), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
187
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
19).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
20).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (
=
20).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (
=
169).
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
188
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
93).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
79).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
79,
=
79).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
35).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
79).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
79,
=
79).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
38).
● Shoot within ash range (
=
213).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
94,
=
101).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
80).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (
=
213).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
35).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
94,
=
101).
White spots appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
80).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
61).
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
57). The red-eye reduction lamp (
=
4)
will light up for ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
127).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
160).
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available
in Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Set Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (
=
195 –
=
200).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
106), press the shutter button halfway (
=
27).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
29).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (
=
96).
[
] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (
=
38).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
38).
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
56).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
93).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
80).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (
=
56).
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
27).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
213).
● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (
=
57).
● Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
89,
=
93).
Shots are blurry.
● Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
189
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
160).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
24) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
163) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (
=
64) or [ ] (
=
71) mode
because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the [ ]
button.
● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
● In simple information display mode (
=
108), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (
=
130).
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
26).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
● The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
information (
=
48). If the icons still do not display even when you set the
birthday, re-register face information (
=
48), or make sure that the date/time
are set correctly (
=
163).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
● Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
160,
=
213).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
160).
- Lower the image quality (
=
54).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
213).
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (
=
70).
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
] mode (
=
64).
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
190
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Cannot send images.
● The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
● RAW images cannot be sent. For images captured in both JPEG and RAW
format, only the JPEG version is sent. However, RAW images can be sent using
Image Sync.
● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (
=
153). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (
=
153).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
] is
displayed.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
158).
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
● The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
try again.
● In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnied display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or ltered image display
according to specied conditions. Cancel group or ltered image playback.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (
=
157).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
145).
● To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (
=
136).
● To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (
=
140,
=
142).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (
=
211). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
191
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image./No identication
information
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (
=
114), Magnify* (
=
115), Rotate* (
=
120), Favorites
(
=
121), Edit* (
=
124), Print List* (
=
183), and Photobook Set-up*
(
=
185).
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
117,
=
120,
=
184), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
183) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
185). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
183) or Photobook Set-up (
=
185) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
116), Erase
(
=
118), Favorites (
=
121), Print List (
=
183), or Photobook Set-up
(
=
185).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
159), or format the memory card (
=
160).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
20).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (
=
20).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
20).
Memory card error (
=
160)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(
=
20), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
35,
=
59,
=
78,
=
98) or edit images (
=
124). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
118) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
20).
Touch AF unavailable
● Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (
=
195).
Touch AF canceled
● The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (
=
92).
Charge the battery (
=
19)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
116)
192
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is
set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Save the images sent via Image Sync (
=
153) to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
Other Accessories
The camera rattles when shaken.
● If you shake the camera when it is off, the lens will make a noise as it moves. This
does not indicate damage.
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
180) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
182). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
142).
● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (
=
142).
IP address conict
● Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
193
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(20) Quick Set menu (
=
30)
(21) Focus range (
=
86,
=
86),
AF lock (
=
93)
(22) AF frame (
=
89), Spot AE point
frame (
=
79)
(23) Shutter speed (
=
98,
=
99)
(24) Aperture value (
=
99,
=
99)
(25) Electronic level (
=
55)
(26) Exposure level (
=
99)
(27) ISO speed (
=
80)
(28) Grid lines (
=
102)
(29) DR correction (
=
82)
(30) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
37)
(31) Touch Shutter (
=
46)
(32) Camera shake warning (
=
38)
(33) Zoom bar (
=
35)
(34) Audio recording mode (
=
76)
(35) Time zone (
=
162)
(36) Image stabilization (
=
56)
(37) MF indicator (
=
86)
(38) Exposure compensation (
=
79)
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
[Charge the battery]
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
7
)
(
10
)
(
9
)
(
6
)
(
12
)(
13
)(
14
) (
15
)(
16
) (
17
) (
18
) (
19
)
(
20
)
(
21
)
(
22
)
(
37
)
(
38
)
(
23
)
(
30
)
(
32
)
(
24
) (
26
)(
25
) (
27
) (
28
)
(
34
)
(
35
)
(
33
)
(
29
)
(
11
)
(
8
)
(
31
)
(
36
)
(1) Shooting mode (
=
195), Scene
icon (
=
39)
(2) Flash mode (
=
93)
(3) Flash exposure compensation
/ Flash output level (
=
94,
=
101)
(4) Shadow correction (
=
83)
(5) Metering method (
=
79)
(6) Eco mode (
=
161)
(7) ND filter (
=
83)
(8) Self-timer (
=
45)
(9) Drive mode (
=
47), AEB
shooting (
=
81), Focus
bracketing (
=
88)
(10) White balance (
=
83), Mercury
lamp correction (
=
53)
(11) My Colors (
=
85)
(12) IS mode icon (
=
40)
(13) Battery level (
=
193)
(14) Still image compression (
=
96),
Recording pixel setting (
=
96)
(15) Recordable shots (
=
212)*
(16) Zoom magnification (
=
41),
Digital tele-converter (
=
89)
(17) Movie quality (
=
54)
(18) Remaining time (
=
213)
(19) Histogram (
=
108)
194
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(30) Compression (image quality)
(
=
96) / Recording pixel
setting (
=
54), Digest movies
(
=
37), RAW (
=
96), MP4
(movies), Albums (
=
130)
(31) Still images: Recording pixel
setting (
=
212)
Movies: Playback time (
=
213)
(32) File size
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
169).
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
106).
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (
=
129) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (
=
129) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected,
=
129)
Edit (
=
128)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
180).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
) (
3
) (
4
)(
5
) (
6
)(
7
)(
8
)(
9
) (
10
) (
11
)
(
12
) (
13
) (
14
) (
15
) (
16
)
(
17
)
(
24
) (
26
) (
28
) (
30
)
(
25
) (
27
) (
29
)
(
31
) (
32
)
(
18
) (
19
) (
20
) (
21
) (
22
)(
23
)
(1) Movies (
=
35,
=
106)
(2) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
(3) Histogram (
=
108)
(4) Battery level (
=
193)
(5) Wi-Fi signal strength (
=
152)
(6) Image Sync (
=
153)
(7) Image editing (
=
124), Movie
compression (
=
129)
(8) Favorites (
=
121)
(9) Protection (
=
116)
(10) Folder number - File number
(
=
159)
(11) Shooting date/time (
=
21)
(12) Shooting mode (
=
195)
(13) Shutter speed (
=
98,
=
99)
(14) Aperture value (
=
99,
=
99)
(15) Exposure compensation level
(
=
79)
(16) ISO speed (
=
80)
(17) Metering method (
=
79)
(18) Flash (
=
93), Flash exposure
compensation (
=
94)
(19) White balance (
=
83)
(20) White balance correction
(
=
84), Mercury lamp
correction (
=
53), Creative
Shot effect (
=
60)
(21) My Colors (
=
85,
=
126)
(22) Focus range (
=
86,
=
86)
(23) ND filter (
=
83)
(24) Red-eye correction (
=
127),
Short clip playback effect
(
=
76)
(25) High ISO NR (
=
81)
(26) DR correction (
=
82)
(27) Shadow correction (
=
83)
(28) Image quality / Frame rate
(movies) (
=
54)
(29) Group playback (
=
113)
195
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Drive Mode (
=
47)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Flash (
=
93)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / *
3
/ *
3
/ / / / /
/ / / / / *
3
/ / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Icons in black, such as , indicate that the function is available or
automatically set in that shooting mode.
Gray icons, such as , indicate that the function is unavailable in that
shooting mode.
Exposure Compensation (
=
79)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
ISO Speed (
=
80)
Auto
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
125 – 12800
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
AF operation (
=
91)
ONE SHOT
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / *
2
/ / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
SERVO
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
196
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
AE Lock (during recording)/Exposure Compensation (
=
75)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
AF Lock (when assigned to the [ ] or movie button) (
=
93)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Focus Range (
=
86,
=
86)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Manual Focus Switching When Recording Movies (
=
74)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Move AF Frame (
=
89)
Center
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Periphery
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / *
5
/ *
5
/ *
5
/ / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / /
Flash Exposure Compensation (
=
94)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Flash Output Level (
=
101)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Av/Tv Settings (
=
98,
=
99)
Aperture Value
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Shutter Speed
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Bulb Setting
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Program Shift (
=
79)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
AE Lock/FE Lock in Standby (
=
79,
=
95)*
4
*
1
/ *
1
/ *
6
/ / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
197
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Quick Set Menu
AF method (
=
89)
+Tracking
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
1-point AF
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Image quality
For details, see “Shooting Tab” (
=
200).
Movie Quality (
=
54,
=
54)
When Set to NTSC
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / *
2
/ / / /
/ / / / / /
Touch AF (
=
92)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / *
6
/
*
6
/ *
6
/ *
5
/ *
5
/ *
5
/ / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / /
Face Select (
=
92)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Touch Shutter (
=
46)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / *
7
/ / / *
6
/ / / / /
/ / / / / /
Still Image Shooting When Recording Movies (
=
74)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Change Display (
=
29)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 [SERVO] when subject movement is detected.
*3 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
*4 FE lock not available in [
] ash mode.
*5 Only when [
] is selected.
*6 Only available when faces are detected.
*7 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
198
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Self-Timer Settings (
=
46)
Delay*
3
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Shots*
4
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
ND Filter (
=
83)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
52)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / *
5
/ / *
5
/
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / *
2
/ / / /
/ / / / / /
When Set to PAL
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / *
2
/ / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / *
2
/ / / /
/ / / / / /
Self-Timer (
=
45)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
199
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
My Colors (
=
85)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
/ / *
6
/ *
6
/ / / / / / / *
7
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
DR Correction (
=
82)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Shadow Correction (
=
83)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
White Balance (
=
83)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
/ / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
/
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
White Balance Correction (
=
84)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Color Adjustment (
=
73)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
200
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Metering Method (
=
79)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
/
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (
=
65).
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*4 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*5 Automatically set, matching the aspect ratio specied in [Movie Quality].
*6 White balance is not available.
*7 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,
and skin tone.
Shooting Tab
[ 1] Tab
Rec. Mode (
=
61,
=
62,
=
74)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Image quality (
=
53,
=
96)
JPEG
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
201
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Reverse Disp. (
=
28)
On/Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Display Mode (
=
173)
Power Saving
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Smooth
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
[ 2] Tab
Review image after shooting (
=
58)
Display Time
Off/Quick
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Hold
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
RAW
–
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
52)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Shooting information display (
=
102)
Display switching
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Grid display
Grid1
/Grid2
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
2.35:1/1.85:1/1.75:1/1.66:1/4:3
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Histogram
Brightness/RGB
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
202
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
[ ] button
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
[ ] button
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
[ ] button
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Save Settings (
=
104)
Save to mode: C1
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Save to mode: C2
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Digital Zoom (
=
41)
Standard
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Display Info
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Detailed
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Touch Shutter (
=
46)
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Face ID Settings (
=
48)
On/Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Function Assignment (
=
103)
[
] ring/[ ] dial/[ ] dial
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Shortcut Button
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
203
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Small
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Continuous AF (
=
91)
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
AF+MF (
=
87)
On/Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
AF-assist Beam (
=
57)
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Lock
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
1.6x/2.0x
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
AF-Point Zoom (
=
55)
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
[ 3] Tab
AF operation (
=
91)
For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”
(
=
195).
AF method (
=
89)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
AF Frame Size (
=
89)*
2
Normal
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
204
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
MF Memory
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
MF Peaking Settings (
=
88)
Peaking
On/Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Level
Low/High
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Color
Red/Yellow/Blue
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
IS Settings (
=
56)
IS Mode
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
[ 4] Tab
MF-Point Zoom (
=
86)
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
2x/4x
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Safety MF (
=
86)
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Recall Zoom/MF Settings (
=
104)
Zoom Memory
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
205
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
[ 5] Tab
ISO speed (
=
81)
ISO Speed
For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”
(
=
195).
ISO Auto Settings
Max ISO Speed
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Rate of Change
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
DR Correction (
=
82)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Shadow Correct (
=
83)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Light Metering (
=
79)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
ND Filter (
=
83)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Shoot Only
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Dynamic IS
Low
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Standard
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
High
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Bracketing (
=
81,
=
88)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
206
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Safety FE
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
[ 6] Tab
WB Correction (
=
84)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
My Colors (
=
126)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
High ISO NR (
=
81)
Low/Standard/High
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Hg Lamp Corr. (
=
53)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Spot AE Point (
=
79)
Center/AF Point
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Flash Control (
=
57,
=
94,
=
95,
=
101)
Flash Mode
Auto
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Manual
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Flash Exp. Comp
For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”
(
=
195).
Flash Output
For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”
(
=
195).
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
2nd-curtain
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
207
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Auto Zoom
Face/Upper Body/Whole Body/Manual/Auto
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Save Stills (
=
71)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Star Emphasis (
=
70)
Sharp/Off/Soft
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting (
=
71)
Effect
/ / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Safety Shift (
=
99)
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
[ 7] Tab
Blink Detection (
=
56)
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Display Area (
=
42)
Large/Medium/Small
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Auto Settings (
=
44)
Seek Assist
On
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
208
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Manual
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Disable
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Level
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Wind lter/Attenuator
Wind Filter: Auto
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Wind Filter: Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Attenuator: On/Off
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
Attenuator: Auto
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point].
*3 [Enable] for functions other than Creative Zone and movies.
Shot Interval
15 sec./30 sec./1 min.
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Frame Rate
/ (NTSC), / (PAL)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Shooting Time
60 min./90 min./120 min./Unlimited
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
[ 8] Tab
Digest Type (
=
37)
Include Stills/No Stills
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / /
Movie Quality (
=
54)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Sound rec. (
=
76)
Sound rec.
Auto*
3
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
209
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Tab Item Reference Page
4
Touch Operation
=
164
Units
=
164
Wi-Fi Settings
=
133
Mobile Device Connect Button
=
136
Certication Logo Display
=
164
Copyright Info
=
165
Reset All
=
165
My Menu Tab
Tab Item Reference Page
1
My Menu settings
=
105
Playback Tab
Tab Item Reference Page
1
Protect
=
116
Rotate
=
120
Erase
=
118
Favorites
=
121
Slideshow
=
115
2
Album Playback
=
130
List/Play Digest Movies
=
109
Set Up Tab
Tab Item Reference Page
1
Create Folder
=
159
File Numbering
=
159
Format
=
160
Video system
=
160
Electronic Level
=
55
Start-up Image
=
164
2
Eco Mode
=
161
Power Saving
=
27
LCD Brightness
=
162
Night Display
=
161
Time Zone
=
162
Date/Time
=
163
Lens Retraction
=
163
3
Language
=
163
Mute
=
163
Volume
=
163
Sound Options
=
164
Headphones
=
177
Hints & Tips
=
164
210
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Tab Item Reference Page
3
i-Contrast
=
126
Resize
=
124
Cropping
=
125
Red-Eye Correction
=
127
My Colors
=
126
Face ID Info
=
110
4
Print settings
=
181
Photobook Set-up
=
185
5
Transition Effect
=
106
Index Effect
=
110
Scroll Display
=
106
Group Images
=
113
Auto Rotate
=
121
Resume
=
106
6
Set Shortcut button
=
122
Set Touch Actions
=
123
Print Tab
Item Reference Page
Print
–
Select Images & Qty.
=
184
Select Range
=
184
Select All Images
=
184
Clear All Selections
=
185
Print Settings
=
183
211
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Wi-Fi
Standards
IEEE 802.11b/g/n*
* 2.4 GHz band only
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Communication
Modes
Infrastructure mode*
1
, Ad hoc mode*
2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS
Supported
Channels
1 ‒ 11
Security
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent)
Digital Zoom [Standard]
24 – 2400 mm
(Represents the combined focal length
of optical and digital zoom.)
Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x 38.4 ‒ 960 mm
Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x 48.0 ‒ 1200 mm
Specications
Camera Specications
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 20.2 million pixels
Lens Focal
Length
25x zoom: 8.8 (W) – 220.0 (T) mm
(35mm lm equivalent: 24 (W) – 600 (T) mm)
LCD Monitor
3.2-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 1,620,000 dots
File Format
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version
1.1) compliant
Data Type
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon
Original))
Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264; Audio:
MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo))
Interface
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Microphone input
Headphone output
Power Source
Battery Pack NB-10L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
Dimensions
(Based on CIPA
Guidelines)
123.3 x 76.5 x 105.3 mm
(4.85 x 3.01 x 4.15 in.)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 733 g (approx. 1.62 lb.; including the battery
pack/batteries and memory card)
Approx. 690 g (approx. 1.52 lb.; camera body only)
212
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Number of Shots per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (
=
52) of 3:2 per memory card
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Number of
Recording Pixels
Compression
Ratio
Number of Shots per Memory Card
(Approx. shots)
16 GB
(Large)
20M/
5472x3648
1686
2729
(Medium 1)
12M/
4320x2880
2612
4152
(Medium 2)
4M/2304x1536
8377
14724
(Small)
0.3M/720x480
48592
69418
RAW Images
5472x3648
– 610
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots Approx. 300
Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Approx. 410
Movie Recording Time*
1
Approx. 1 hour, 5 minutes
Movie Recording Time (Continuous
Shooting*
2
)
Approx. 2 hours, 5 minutes
Playback Time*
3
Approx. 6 hours
*1 Time under these conditions.
- [
] mode
- Quality: [
]
- With repeated recording, stopping, zooming, and turning the camera on and off
*2 Time under these conditions.
- [
] mode
- Quality: [
]
- Without zooming or other operations
- Recording is resumed immediately after stopping automatically at a le size of
4 GB or a time of about 29:59
*3 Time when playing back a slideshow of still images.
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
213
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
(
)
Maximum Telephoto
( )
–
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 85 cm (2.8 ft.) – innity
Other
modes
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 85 cm (2.8 ft.) – innity
*
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Continuous
Shooting Mode
Speed
Approx. 5.9 shots/sec.
● Speed when using an 16 GB UHS-I memory card specied in Canon
testing standards. Note that the number of shots varies depending on
subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors.
Recording Time per Memory Card
Image Quality
Recording Time per Memory Card
16 GB
[
] [ ]
59 min. 30 sec.
[
] [ ]*
1
[ ]
1 hr. 26 min. 05 sec.*
2
[ ] [ ]
4 hr. 05 min. 15 sec.
[
] [ ]
10 hr. 22 min. 35 sec.
*1 Actual frame rate: 23.976 fps.
*2 52 min. 12 sec. for iFrame movies (
=
77).
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
● Recording will automatically stop when the clip le size reaches 4 GB,
or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59
seconds when shooting in [
], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ] or [ ], or approximately 1 hour when
shooting in [ ] or [ ].
● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been
reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 10 or higher
memory cards are recommended.
Flash Range
Maximum wide angle ( )
60 cm – 6.8 m (2.0 – 22 ft.)
Maximum telephoto (
)
85 cm – 3.1 m (2.8 – 10 ft.)
214
Index
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shutter Speed
[ ] mode,
automatically set range
1 – 1/2000 sec.
Available values in
[
], [ ], or [ ] mode
(sec.)*
30, 25, 20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2,
1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6,
1/8, 1/10, 1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40,
1/50, 1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200,
1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800,
1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000
* In [ ] mode, shutter speeds of 1/25 seconds or slower are not available.
Aperture
f/number f/2.8 / f/11 (W) – f/5.6 / f/11 (T)
Available values in
[ ], [ ], or [ ]
mode*
f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0, f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3,
f/7.1, f/8.0, f/9.0, f/10, f/11
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
Battery Pack NB-10L
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 7.4 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 920 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz),
0.18 A (100 V) – 0.12 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 8.4 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 1 hr. 50 min. (when using NB-10L)
Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
215
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Index
A
AC adapter kit 168, 170
Accessories 168
AEB shooting 81
AE lock 79
AF frames 89
AF lock 93
AF method 89
Aspect ratio 52
Attenuator 76
AUTO mode (shooting mode) 23, 35
Av (shooting mode) 99
B
Background defocus
(shooting mode) 66
Batteries
→
Date/time (date/time battery)
Battery charger 2, 168
Battery pack
Charging 19
Eco mode 161
Level 193
Power saving 27
Black and white images 85
Blink detection 56
C
Camera
Reset all 165
Camera access point mode 140
Camera Connect 134
CameraWindow 178
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 145
Clock 34
Color (white balance) 83
Compression 96
Connecting via an access point 142
Continuous shooting 40, 47
Creative lters (shooting mode) 62
Creative shot 59
Cropping 125, 181
Custom white balance 84
D
Date/time
Changing 21
Date/time battery 22
Settings 21
World clock 162
DC coupler 170
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter 89
Digital zoom 41
Display language 22
DPOF 183
Dynamic Range Correction 82
E
Eco mode 161
Editing
Cropping 125
i-Contrast 126
My Colors 126
Red-eye correction 127
Resizing images 124
Editing or erasing connection
information 157
Electronic level 55
Erasing 118
Erasing all 119
Error messages 191
Exposure
AE lock 79
Compensation 79
FE lock 95
External microphone 177
F
Face ID 48
Face select 92
Face self-timer (shooting mode) 69
Favorites 121
FE lock 95
File numbering 159
Fireworks (shooting mode) 61
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 64
Flash
Deactivating ash 94
Flash exposure compensation 94
On 93
Slow synchro 94
Focus bracketing 88
Focus check 115
Focusing
AF frames 89
AF lock 93
AF-point zoom 55
MF peaking 88
Servo AF 91
Touch AF 92
Focus lock 89
Focus range
Macro 86
Manual focus 86
Framing assist 42
G
Geotagging images 155
GPS information display 108
Grid lines 102
H
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode) 61
HDMI cable 169
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 62
High ISO NR 81
Household power 170
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 37
I
i-Contrast 126
iFrame movies (movie mode) 77
Image quality
→
Compression ratio (image quality)
Images
Display period 58
Erasing 118
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 116
Image stabilization 56, 97
Image Sync 153
Indicator 33, 57
ISO speed 80
J
Jump display 112
L
LCD monitor 28
216
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Wink self-timer
(shooting mode) 68
Sending images 150
Sending images to another
camera 150
Sending images to a smartphone 134
Sending images to Web services 145
Sepia tone images 85
Servo AF 91
Shadow correction 83
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information 102, 193
Short clips (movie mode) 76
Slideshow 115
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) 67
Smile (shooting mode) 67
Snow (shooting mode) 61
Soft focus (shooting mode) 66
Software
Installation 140, 178
Saving images to
a computer 178
Sounds 163
Sports (shooting mode) 60
Standard (movie mode) 74
Star (shooting mode) 70
Star nightscape
(shooting mode) 70
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting mode) 71
Star trails
(shooting mode) 70
Story Highlights 130
Strap 2
Super vivid (shooting mode) 62
T
Terminal 169, 180
Touch Actions 123
Touch AF 92
Touch Shutter 46
Toy camera effect
(shooting mode) 65
Traveling with the camera 162
Troubleshooting 187
TV display 169
Tv (shooting mode) 98
V
Viewing 24
Image search 111
Index display 110
Jump display 112
Magnied display 115
Single-image display 24
Slideshow 115
TV display 169
W
White balance (color) 83
Wi-Fi functions 133
Wi-Fi menu 138
Wind lter 38, 76
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 68
World clock 162
Z
Zoom 23, 36, 41, 42
M
M (shooting mode) 99
Macro (focus range) 86
Magnied display 115
Manual focus (focus range) 86
Manual (movie mode) 101
Memory cards 2
→
Memory cards
Recording time 213
Menu
Basic operations 31
Table 195
Mercury lamp correction 53
Metering method 79
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 64
Mobile device connection button 136
Monochrome (shooting mode) 67
Movies
Editing 128
Image quality (recording pixels/
frame rate) 54
Recording time 213
Multi-area White Balance 53
My Colors 85, 126
N
ND lter 83
Neck strap
→
Strap
Nostalgic (shooting mode) 63
P
P (shooting mode) 78
Package contents 2
Photobook set-up 185
PictBridge 169, 180
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 61
Poster effect (shooting mode) 62
Power 168
→
AC adapter kit,
→
Battery charger,
→
Battery pack
Power saving 27
Printing 180
→
Printing
Program AE 78
Protecting 116
Q
Quick Set menu
Table 197
R
RAW 96
Recording pixels (image size) 53, 96
Red-eye correction 127
Remote shooting 156
Reset all 165
Resizing images 124
Rotating 120
S
Saving images to a computer 178
Screen
Display language 22
Icons 193, 194
Menu
→
FUNC. menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
Searching 111
Self-timer 45
2-second self-timer 45
Customizing the self-timer 46
Face self-timer
(shooting mode) 69
217
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
218
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Trademarks and Licensing
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
219
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Disclaimer
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
